JP2008005934A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress the deterioration of an interest in a game by solving the monotony of a variably stop mode of symbols executed before deriving a lottery result. <P>SOLUTION: If a variable pattern is a small chance combination (Yes in a step S34472), this game machine executes a step of setting the number of A symbols used at the minor win (step S34473), if the variable pattern is a 2R chance combination (Yes in a step S34474), executes a step of setting the number of A symbols used at the 2R win (step S34475), if the variable pattern is a 15R win chance combination (Yes in a step S34476), executes a step of setting the number of A symbols used at the 15R win (step S34477) and changes a specific symbol to an almighty symbol (A symbol). If otherwise these variable patterns (No in a step S34476), this game machine executes an A symbol consuming step (step S34478) and consumes the almighty symbol (A symbol). <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed. Then, for example, a game ball as a game medium is driven toward a game area formed on the game board. The game balls that are driven into the game area flow down along the game board. In the game area, a number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at an appropriate position in the vertical direction of the game area. The game area is provided with a start port capable of receiving a game ball that is driven toward the game area.

  As an example of this type of gaming machine, there is a first type gaming machine. In this first type of gaming machine, lottery means for performing a big win lottery is provided by winning a game ball as a game medium at the start port. When the lottery by the lottery means is won, a big hit game advantageous to the player is generated. The lottery result by the lottery means is derived to a variable display means composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display. For example, there is a gaming machine that hides a part of a symbol with a shutter or the like to surprise a player when notifying the winning of a jackpot game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-18011 A

  However, in the prior art, there has been a discomfort that the pattern variation stop mode prior to the derivation of the lottery result using the variation display means becomes monotonous. In other words, there are gaming machines in which various reach effects are performed by forming the reach aspect, but there are few variations as a pattern variation stop aspect, and if the game progresses without the reach aspect being formed, It has become monotonous. As a result, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and its purpose is to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by eliminating the monotony of the variation stop mode of the symbols prior to the derivation of the lottery result. There is.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is provided with a game area formed, a game board into which a game ball is driven toward the game area, and a game ball that is arranged in the game area of the game board so that the game ball can win a prize. And a start detection means for detecting that a game ball has won at the start opening, and is arranged in the game area, and can be changed between a closed state and an open state. An opening / closing device that allows a game ball to win by being changed to a state, a winning detection means for detecting that a gaming ball has won the opening / closing device, and a variation display means for performing at least a variation display of a symbol; Fluctuation information storage means for storing at least a plurality of fluctuation patterns, which are fluctuation display patterns, lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of a game ball by the start detection means, and the variable information stored in the fluctuation information storage means. Based on the pattern, the variable display means performs a variable display, a variable display control means for performing a stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means, and in response to winning the lottery by the lottery means, A game machine comprising a game control means having at least a jackpot game execution means for performing a jackpot game capable of opening and closing and giving a player a game value, wherein the variation information storage means is used for the variation display. A symbol information storage means for storing information relating to the symbol to be displayed, wherein the game control means changes the information stored in the symbol information storage means, so that a part of the normal symbol is a special symbol with a different appearance It has a symbol change means that can be changed to a symbol, the symbol information storage means, at least information about the changed special symbol, The variable display control means is capable of executing the variable display of the symbols including the special symbols based on the information stored in the symbol information storage means, and the game control means Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the variation display means, the symbol restoration means capable of restoring the special symbol to the normal symbol by changing the information stored in the symbol information storage means. It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the symbol changing means changes a part of the normal symbol to the special symbol, and the variable display control means executes the variable display of the symbols including the special symbol. In this way, by using the special symbol for the variable display, the variable display itself can be highly interesting, and the player can start to expect a big hit game.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is restored to the normal symbol by the symbol restoring means. By digesting the special symbol in this way, the player does not have excessive expectations for the jackpot, while the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot game until all the special symbols are digested. Can be sustained.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the symbol variation stop mode prior to the derivation of the lottery result, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened on one side of the outer frame of the pachinko machine 1 and the front frame is opened on one side of the main body frame 3. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the entire front side of the pachinko machine. In FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the decorative member in the game area 37 is omitted.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a front frame 4, a game board 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left, and right wooden frame members, and has a lower receiving plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the front lower portion of the outer frame 2. A main body frame 3 is attached to one side of the entire surface of the outer frame 2 by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. The outer frame 2 may be formed of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

[Body frame configuration]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main body frame 3 and the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 separated from the upper right front.

  The main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 11, the game board mounting frame 12 and the mechanism mounting body 13 with a synthetic resin or the like. The front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 1). A body frame side hinge device 15 is fixed to the upper and lower portions of one side of the front frame body 11, and hinge pins and hinge holes are provided to the outer frame side hinge device 14 fixed to the upper and lower portions of one side of the outer frame 2. It is mounted so that it can be opened and closed freely. That is, the hinge mechanism 7 is constituted by the outer frame side hinge device 14, the main body frame side hinge device 15, the hinge pin, and the hinge hole.

  On the front side of the front frame body 11, a speaker box portion 16 is integrally formed in the front lower left area of the front frame body 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, and is formed in the front opening portion of the speaker box portion 16. The speaker mounting plate 17 is mounted so as to close the opening. A speaker 18 is mounted on the speaker mounting board.

  In the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 11, a firing rail 19 is attached to the upper half of the front frame 11 in an inclined manner. A lower front plate 30 is mounted on the lower half of the lower area of the front surface of the front frame 11. A lower tray 31 capable of storing game balls is provided at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the lower front plate 30, an operation handle 32 is provided on the right side, and an ashtray 33 is provided on the left side. . The lower plate 31 is provided with a ball discharge lever 34 for discharging the game ball downward.

[Configuration of the front frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. The front frame 4 is mounted on one side of the front surface of the front frame body 11 so as to cover a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 11 to the upper edge of the lower front plate 30 so as to be opened and closed forward by a hinge mechanism 36. Yes.

  A substantially circular opening window 38 through which a game area 37 formed on the surface of the game board 5 can be seen through from the front is formed at a substantially central portion of the front frame 4. A window frame 39 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 38 is provided on the rear side of the front frame 4, and a transparent plate 50 such as a glass plate or a transparent resin plate is attached to the window frame 39. A substantially entire front surface of the front frame 4 is decorated by a front decoration member in which a lamp or the like is provided, and an upper plate 51 is formed at a lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 4. Specifically, in the periphery of the opening window 38, side decoration devices 52 are mounted on the left and right sides, an upper plate 51 is mounted on the lower portion, and an acoustic lighting device 53 is mounted on the upper portion.

  The side decoration device 52 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 54 in which a lamp driving substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 54 in the vertical direction, and a lens 55 corresponding to the light source disposed on the lamp driving substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 53 includes a transparent cover body 56, a speaker 57, a speaker cover 58, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit.

  An effect selection switch 60 is provided on the left side of the front surface of the upper plate 51. The effect selection switch 60 is configured to be pressed by the player himself. When the player depresses the effect selection switch 60, the player's intention can be reflected in the effect display on the effect image display device 115 described later. Note that a lever or a switch may be used instead of the effect selection switch 60. Moreover, the voice input means which receives a player's voice may be sufficient. In other words, any device that reflects the player's intention is acceptable.

[Configuration of locking device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 3. A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a function of locking the front frame 4 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the free end side opposite to the hinge mechanism 36 of the front frame body 11 The locking device 70 having both of the above is mounted.

  That is, in this embodiment, the locking device 70 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 72 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 71 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the body frame 3 in a closed state, From the front of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 74 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 73 provided on the rear side of the free end side of the front frame 4 to lock the front frame 4 in a closed state. And a cylinder lock 75 exposed through the front frame body 11 and the lower front plate 30 so that the key can be inserted and unlocked. Then, a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 72 and the closing tool 71 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked. By rotating in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 74 and the closing tool 73 of the front frame 4 is released and the front frame 4 is unlocked.

[Composition of game board mounting frame]
A description will be given with reference to FIGS. 1, 3 and 4. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3 is provided on the rear side of the front frame body 11 and the game board 5 is mounted so as to be attachable / detachable from the front. .

  The game board 5 is formed in a substantially square plate shape having a size to be fitted from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 (see FIG. 11). A guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 5, and a game area 37 is defined inside the guide rail 78.

  A predetermined gap is provided between the launch rail 19 and the guide rail 78, and when the launched game ball returns to the guide rail 78, the game ball is discharged from the gap. The lower plate 31 is guided.

  Further, a front structural member 79 made of synthetic resin is attached to the front surface of the game board 5 in the outer region of the guide rail 78.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower part on the rear side of the game board 5 receives a game ball that has flowed into the various winning devices in a portion extending from the center part to the lower part, and serves as a collective bag for guiding the game ball to a predetermined position. A box mounting base 118 having both the above function and the function as a box mounting portion is provided.

  A peripheral control board box 130 in which peripheral control boards 610 such as a voice control board and a lamp control board are accommodated is mounted on the box mounting base 118, and is superposed on the rear side of the peripheral control board box 130 in a state where it is superposed. A main control board box 132 in which the control board 510 is housed is mounted.

  Further, in a state where the box mounting base 118, the peripheral control board box 130 and the main control board box 132 are respectively mounted on the rear side of the game board 5, the game board 5 is moved from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3. The box mounting base 118, the peripheral control board box 130, and the main control board box 132 are arranged without protruding outside the outline of the game board 5 so that they can be fitted and installed.

[Structure of body mounting mechanism, ball tank and tank rail]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the state in which various members are assembled to the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 from the diagonally upper right rear, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the main body frame 3 alone from the diagonally upper right rear.

  A tank mounting portion 133, a rail mounting portion 134, a dispensing device mounting portion 135, and the like are formed on the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3, and a ball tank 136 is mounted on the tank mounting portion 133.

  The ball tank 136 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is formed in a box shape opening upward so that a large number of game balls supplied from the island facility can be stored. The storage state of the game balls in the ball tank 136 is visible through the rear side wall of the ball tank 136.

  In addition, a discharge port 138 for discharging a game ball is formed at the rear corner of the bottom plate portion 137 of the ball tank 136, and the bottom plate portion 137 is formed on an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the discharge port 138. .

  The mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is integrally formed with a rail mounting portion 134 so as to approach the tank mounting portion 133 downward, and the rail component 139 is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 so that the tank rail 150 is configured. That is, in this embodiment, the rail mounting portion 134 is formed in a state in which the upper lateral portion of the main body frame 3 is recessed by a predetermined depth, and the rear side wall of the recess is used as the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150. An inclined rail shelf 155 is formed along the lower edge of the concave portion so as to incline downward from one end (left side in FIG. 8) to the other end (right end in FIG. 8). An upward surface extending in the lateral direction of the rail shelf 155 is a rail receiving portion 158.

  The rail constituting member 139 that is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 and constitutes the tank rail 150 includes a rear wall portion 152 that forms a rail passage between the rail mounting portion 134 and the front wall portion 151, and an inclined lower plate And a partition wall (both not shown) that project along the center in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate part and divide the rail passage into front and rear rows (in this embodiment, front and rear rows). It is formed in preparation.

  The rail constituting member 139 is attached to the rail attaching portion 134 by an appropriate attachment means, whereby the tank rail 150 having a plurality of front and rear rail passages is configured. Then, after the game balls discharged from the discharge port 138 of the ball tank 136 (dropped by its own weight) are received at one end of the rail passages in the front and rear rows of the tank rail 150, the game balls are moved along the rail passage by their own weight. And rolling toward the other end of the rail passage.

  Further, in this embodiment, the rail component member 139 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, whereby the flow state of the game balls in the rail passage is visually recognized through the rear wall portion 152 of the rail component member 139. It is possible.

  The front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150 (rail mounting portion 134) has a first space portion in order to avoid interference with the rear upper end portion of equipment (for example, the center accessory 300) that protrudes to the rear side of the game board 5. It is provided in a separated state.

  In this embodiment, the rear end of the rail shelf 155 serving as the rear end portion of the main body frame 3 and the rear wall portion of the tank rail 150 are substantially flush with the rear side wall of the ball tank 136. In other words, the tank rail 150 is arranged rearwardly from the rear surface of the game board 5 until the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136 is substantially flush with the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136. Thus, a first space portion for avoiding interference with the rear portion of the center accessory 300 is provided between the rear side of the game board 5 and the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150.

  Above the tank rail 150, a rectifier 156 for aligning the game balls flowing in the rail passage without overlapping each other is mounted on the upper portion thereof so as to be swingable about the shaft 157. The rectifier 156 is provided with a weight from the center to the bottom.

[Configuration of payout device mounting part and ball payout device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. A vertically long paying device mounting portion 135 corresponding to a ball paying device (ball paying unit) 170 described below is formed in the vertical direction of one side of the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3. The dispensing device mounting portion 135 is formed in a concave shape having an opening on the rear side.

  In addition, an opening 173 through which a payout motor 172 (see FIG. 3) of the ball payout device 170 can project is formed at a predetermined position of a back wall portion (not shown) having a stepped shape of the payout device mounting portion 135. Yes.

  In a state where the ball paying device 170 is mounted in the recess of the paying device mounting portion 135, a second space portion is provided between the game board 5 and the first space portion, which is at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. . Thus, the rail passage and the ball passage are arranged at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the rear end of the body frame 3, that is, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion of the dispensing device mounting portion 135, the rear end of the rail shelf 155, the rear surfaces of the ball tank 136, the tank rail 150, and the ball dispensing device 170 are substantially the same surface. There is no.

  The ball payout device 170 has a vertically long box shape that is substantially the same size as the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135, and is unitized by mounting various parts related to payout.

  The ball payout device 170 is fitted from the rear opening of the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135 and is mounted by appropriate mounting means (for example, mounting means such as an elastic clip, a locking claw, and a screw). ing.

  Although not shown, the ball dispensing device 170 is formed by dividing the ball passages having inflow ports respectively communicating with the outlets of the rail passages in the tank rail 150 into a plurality of front and rear rows (for example, front and rear rows). Further, the downstream portions of the front and rear rows of ball passages formed in the interior are bifurcated to form front and rear rows of award balls, a ball rental ball passage, and a ball removal ball passage. A payout member (not shown) made of a rotating body for distributing and paying out game balls to any of the passages is rotated in the forward and reverse directions at the branch portion between the winning ball and the ball passage for lending and the ball passage for ball removal. It is arranged to be possible.

[Equipment on the lower rear of the main frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. On the rear side of the front frame 11 of the main body frame 3, on one side (left side in FIG. 4) of the rear lower region of the front frame 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, A launching device unit in which a launching hammer (not shown) for launching a game ball sent to the launching position of the tilted end, a launching motor 192 for differentially launching the launching hammer, and the like are assembled to the mounting substrate 193 and unitized. 194 is installed.

  A power supply board box 196 for receiving the power supply board 195 is mounted at a substantially central portion of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11, and the dispensing control board 197 is received in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the power supply board box 196. A payout control board box 198 is mounted.

  The payout control board 197 includes a RAM for storing the number of game balls to be paid out, and transmits a control signal for paying out game balls in accordance with a payout signal transmitted from the main control board 510 to a relay circuit board (not shown). Thus, the operation of the payout motor 172 is controlled.

[Configuration of rear cover body]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine 1 from the upper right rear.

  The rear end portions of the display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 9) and the main control board box 132 arranged on the rear surface of the game board 5 protrude toward the window opening portion opened in the center portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. .

  Between the side wall portion constituting one side wall of the window opening portion of the mechanism mounting body 13 and the one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135 constituting the other end wall, an opaque synthetic resin material is formed into a substantially square box shape. Then, the rear cover body 210 is detachably mounted by a cover hinge mechanism 211.

  The rear cover body 210 is configured integrally with a substantially rectangular rear wall portion 212 and a peripheral wall portion 213 that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the rear wall portion 212. Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the one side wall portion 213 a is respectively viewed from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 formed at a total of three locations above and below the rear wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. A hinge body 216 having a hinge pin 215 that is detachably fitted downward is integrally formed.

  Further, of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the other wall portion 213b has a locking claw that can be elastically engaged with a locking hole formed in one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. An elastic closing body 217 is integrally formed.

  That is, in the rear cover body 210, the hinge pins 215 of the upper and lower and intermediate hinge bodies 216 are respectively fitted from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 of the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. In this state, the rear cover body 210 is rotated toward the other side of the mechanism mounting body 13 around the hinge pin 215, and the elastic closing body 217 is inserted into the locking hole on one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. The rear cover body 210 is held in the closed state on the rear side of the mechanism mounting body 13 by being elastically engaged. Then, the rear cover body 210 covers the entire display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 9) on the rear surface of the game board 5 and a portion extending from the substantially middle portion to the upper end of the main control board box 132 by the rear cover body 210. ing. As a result, the board connector of the main control board 510 exposed to the upper part of the main control board box 132 (mainly a board connector for connecting to the display device control board 116) is hidden from view from behind.

  Further, a portion from the substantially middle portion to the lower end of the main control board box 132 is exposed without being covered by the rear cover body 210. The inspection connector 218 disposed on the main control board 510 is exposed below the main control board box 132, and the inspection connector on the main control board 510 is closed with the rear cover body 210 closed. A board inspection device (not shown) can be connected to the connector 218 for inspection.

  A large number of heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233 are provided in the rear cover body 210, and internal heat is released from these many heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233. . In this embodiment, the rear cover body 210 is provided with a large number of slit-like heat radiation holes 230 extending from the peripheral wall portion 213 to the rear wall portion 212, and from the substantially middle height position of the rear wall portion 212 to the upper portion. A large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 231 are penetrated, and a large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 232 and a predetermined number of horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 are penetrated below the rear wall 212. Has been.

  Further, the horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 have a size corresponding to the size and arrangement position of the plurality of parallel seal portions 235 sealed by the seal screws (sealing members) of the main control board box 132. It penetrates the position. As a result, even when the opaque rear cover body 210 is closed, the plurality of parallel sealing portions 235 of the main control board box 132 are exposed so as to be visible at the portion of the heat radiation hole 233. For this reason, even when the rear cover body 210 is closed, the sealing state of the sealing portion 235 of the main control board box 132 can be easily visually confirmed. Further, since the opaque synthetic resin material can be easily used as a synthetic resin material that is recycled compared to the transparent synthetic resin material, the rear cover body 210 can be manufactured at low cost.

  Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, a predetermined position (two places on the left and right in this embodiment) of the upper wall portion 213c is substantially C-shaped to hold a power cord (not shown) in an appropriately folded state. An elastically deformable cord holder 237 extends toward the rear wall surface of the upper tank rail 150 (the rear wall surface of the rail component 139). A knob for removing the power cord by elastically deforming the cord holder 237 is formed at the tip of the cord holder 237.

  One end of the power cord is detachably connected to the board connector 239 of the distribution board 238, and the power plug at the other end is inserted into a power outlet. As described above, the cord holder 237 is integrally formed on the rear cover body 210 and the power cord is held, so that the power cord hangs and gets caught by foreign objects when the pachinko machine is transported and stored. Problems can be prevented.

[Structure of ball derivatives for lower pan, etc. at rear lower part of body frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 6. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear cover body 210 and various control boards are removed from the perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG.

  A lower dish ball derivative 253 is attached to the other side portion (hinge portion) of the rear lower region of the main body frame 3 in the recessed portion of the rear step portion of the speaker box portion 16. The lower tray ball derivative 253 is used when the game balls paid out to the upper plate 51 through the upper plate connecting path (not shown) from the winning and rental ball passages of the ball dispensing device 170 are full. The game ball on the upper plate communication path is for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 31.

  In this embodiment, a board box 254 that houses the interface board 252 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear wall of the lower plate ball derivative 253. The interface board 252 is interposed between the ball rental machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 197, and transmits / receives a signal relating to ball rental between the ball rental machine and the payout control board 197. Electrical connection is possible.

[About the configuration of the game board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing the configuration of the game board 5 having the game area 37. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the game board 5 from obliquely forward.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the game board 5 has a substantially circular game area forming wall 80 that forms the game area 37. Inside the game area forming wall 80 (on the game area 37 side) and on the left side, a guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 for guiding the game ball to the game area 37 is provided. A game ball launched from the launcher unit 194 (see FIG. 7) is driven toward the game area 37 along the guide rail.

  In the center of the game area 37, a center accessory 300 is arranged. The center accessory 300 has a size that occupies more than two-thirds of the width direction of the game area 37. The center accessory 300 has a substantially rectangular opening 301, and an effect image display device 115 is disposed in the opening 301. The center accessory 300 has a frame-shaped decorative body 370, and the frame-shaped decorative body 370 is provided along the opening edge of the opening 301.

  A first start port 390 that can receive a game ball driven toward the game area 37 is disposed below the center combination 300. Below the first start port 390, a third start port 394 having a pair of movable pieces 396 (the second start port will be described later) is disposed. When the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the closed state, the third starting port 394 is unable to receive the game ball or is difficult to receive, and when the pair of movable pieces 396 is in the open state, It becomes easier to accept a game ball than the one start port 390. In addition, as for a pair of movable piece 396 illustrated in FIG.10, FIG.11 and FIG.12, both an open state and a closed state are represented by the continuous line.

  In the present embodiment, “downward” means the downstream side of the game ball in the downflow direction, and “upward” means the upstream side of the game ball in the downflow direction.

  An opening 372 is formed in the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 directly above the first start port 390.

  An opening / closing device for production 398 is provided on the upper part of the center accessory 300. The effect opening / closing device 398 includes an effect large winning opening 3981 and an opening / closing door 3982 provided corresponding to the effect large winning opening 3981.

  The stage prize winning opening 3981 is an open area where a game ball can be received. Specifically, among the six directions around the upper side, the lower side, the left side, the right side, the near side and the back side, This is an area in which openings are formed on the front side and the upper side as viewed, and walls are formed on the left side, the right side, the lower side, and the rear side. The opening on the near side from the player is closed by a glass plate attached to the window frame 39. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball received in the large prize winning opening 3981 for performance. On the other hand, the upper opening is configured to be opened and closed by an opening / closing door 3982 described later. Further, the back wall is made of a transparent member that can transmit light, and behind this transparent member is provided an effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 that can emit light by switching between red and green. Yes. That is, the effect opening / closing device status display lamp 651 can be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398.

  The opening / closing door 3982 is a member for switching the opening on the upper side of the effect winning prize opening 3981 between an open state in which a game ball can be received and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be received or difficult. Specifically, it is a movable piece made up of a rectangular flat plate configured to be able to be taken in and out in a direction substantially orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 5 (that is, the front-rear direction), and the open / close door 3982 is viewed from the player. When the game board 5 protrudes from the board surface to the near side, the upper opening is closed, and when it is retracted to the board surface side of the game board 5 (in this embodiment, the board surface of the game board 5 and the open / close door 3982 are substantially planes. The upper opening opens. As described above, the opening / closing door 3982 is configured to be freely inserted and removed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 5, so that the area of the effect opening / closing device 398 occupying the game area 37 can be saved. it can. In recent years, since the effect image display device 115 has been enlarged in order to enhance the interest of the game related to the effect, it is necessary to efficiently provide each member in the game area 37, and the effect is remarkable. In particular, in this embodiment, since the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided separately from the hit jack game opening / closing device 400 provided conventionally, the area of the effect opening / closing device 398 occupying the game area 37 is reduced. The effect by is tremendous.

  In addition, when the stage prize winning opening 3981 is in the closed state, the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 and collides with the flat portion of the open / close door 3982 gives an impact to the flat portion of the open / close door 3982. However, in the present embodiment, the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided above the effect image display device 115, so that the effect opening / closing device 398 is temporarily provided below the first start port 390. The impact that the game ball gives to the flat portion of the effect opening / closing device 398 is reduced. This is because the game ball driven toward the game area 37 is accelerated by gravity, and therefore the speed of the game ball when the door 3982 is provided at the upper side collides with the flat portion of the door 3982. Is small.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 3982 is configured to be freely inserted and removed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 5, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the area of the effect opening / closing device 398 occupying the game area 37 is determined. If the space can be saved, the crossing direction may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the “front-rear direction” means the front-rear direction when viewed from the player.

  A jackpot gaming opening / closing device is provided between the first start port 390 and the ball discharge port 406, specifically below the third start port 394 and above the ball discharge port 406 (directly above in the present embodiment). 400 is provided. The effect opening / closing device 398 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 constitute an opening / closing device 397. The jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 includes a jackpot gaming grand prize opening 4001 and an opening / closing door 4002 provided corresponding to the jackpot gaming big prize opening 4001. The big hit game winning prize opening 4001 is an opening capable of receiving a game ball. The open / close door 4002 is used for switching the jackpot game winning prize opening 4001 between a closed state in which a game ball driven into the game area 37 cannot be received and an open state in which the game ball can be received more easily than the closed state. It is a member. It should be noted that when the jackpot game winning prize opening 4001 is in the closed state, it is not necessarily limited to the fact that it is impossible to accept the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37, and it is difficult, preferably extremely difficult. There may be.

  A passing gate 402 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the center accessory 300, and three lower left corners (on the left side of the first start port 390 and the third start port 394) of the center accessory 300. One general winning opening 404 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the “left side” means the left side as viewed from the player.

  The game balls that have not won any of the start openings 390, 392, 394, the production opening / closing device 398, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, and the general winning opening 404 are most downstream in the flow direction of the game balls. A ball discharge port 406 for discharging behind the board 5 is formed. That is, each of the start ports 390, 392, 394, the effect opening / closing device 398, the jackpot game opening / closing device 400, and the general winning port 404 provided upstream of the ball discharge port 406 in the flow direction of the game ball. The game balls that have not won the prize flow down toward the ball discharge port 406.

  The jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is disposed immediately above the ball discharge port 406. As a result, during the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, game balls that have not won any of the start ports 390, 392, 394, the production opening / closing device 398 and the general winning opening 404 are the jackpot gaming opening / closing device. Since it gathers in the vicinity of 400, it can have a sense of expectation of winning a prize.

  On the lower right of the center object 300, a first special symbol display 84 for displaying a lottery result by a first special symbol lottery means 700, which will be described later, and a second special symbol for displaying a lottery result by a second special symbol lottery means 710. A display 86, a first special symbol hold indicator 88 that displays the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 700, and a second special symbol hold indicator that displays the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 710. 90 is provided.

  Each of these indicators 84, 86, 88, 90 is constituted by, for example, an LED. Depending on the lighting state of the LED, a lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 The number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 710 are notified.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the “number of lottery holds” means the number of holds for determining whether or not the acquired random number for determining whether or not the winning random number for winning is acquired, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of determinations may be the number of determination random numbers for which determination is made and the acquisition determination random numbers are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold indicator 90 may be the number of lots to be held instead of the lottery hold number. In other words, although it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained and whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the determination result is not displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. , The number of such hold may be displayed.

  In the vicinity of the lower frame 370 a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370, the center accessory 300 is downstream of the first shelf (hereinafter referred to as “first stage 330”) and the first stage 330 in the flow direction of the game ball. And a second shelf (hereinafter referred to as “second stage 350”) arranged on the side. The position where the second stage 350 is disposed is on the opposite side of the effect image display device 115 with respect to the first stage 330 (that is, the front (player) side). A step is formed between the first stage 330 and the second stage 350.

  A first stage guiding path for guiding a flowing game ball to the first stage 330 in the vicinity of the substantially vertical center of the left frame 370 b of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 (that is, the side of the frame-shaped decorative body 370). (Hereinafter referred to as "first warp 316") is provided with a first warp inlet 306 that can be received.

  A second warp inlet 308 that can be received in a second stage guide path (hereinafter referred to as “second warp 318”) is provided below the first warp inlet 306 in parallel with the first warp inlet 306. Yes.

  Below the first warp inlet 306 and the second warp inlet 308, a first warp guide piece (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the first warp inlet 306 and the game ball to the second warp inlet 308, respectively. A second warp guide piece 310 is provided. The second warp guide piece 310 protrudes from the frame-shaped decorative body 370 toward the left (that is, from the center accessory 300 to the game area 37). Thereby, the second warp inlet 308 is easier to guide the game ball than the first warp inlet 306. Therefore, even when the game ball is not guided to the first warp entrance 306, the expectation that is accepted by the second warp entrance 308 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

  The first stage 330 has a curved surface formed in a wave shape from the first warp outlet side end 336 to the first warp opposite outlet side end 338. Specifically, a mountain portion 332 that swells upward is formed at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the first stage 330, and a valley portion continuously connected to the mountain portion 332 is formed on the left and right sides of the mountain portion 332. 334 is formed.

  In addition, the height of the peak portion 332 is lower than the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the first warp outlet 312 can get over the mountain portion 332 and reciprocate between the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338. Can move.

  A hill portion 352 is formed at a substantially central portion of the second stage 350. The elevated part 352 is located in front of the peak part 332 of the first stage 330. The second stage 350 has a curved portion 354 having a curved surface formed from the second warp outlet side end portion 356 to the elevated portion 352 in addition to the elevated portion 352. Moreover, it has the curved part 354 in which the curved surface was formed from the 2nd warp opposite exit side edge part 358 to the high platform part 352. FIG. These curved portions 354 are curved below the hill portion 352.

  The height of the hill portion 352 is lower than the second warp outlet side end 356 and the second warp counter-exit side end 358. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the second warp outlet 314 can get over the hill part 352 and reciprocate between the second warp outlet side end part 356 and the second warp counter-exit side end part 358. Can roll.

  The game balls received at the first warp inlet 306 and the second warp inlet 308 are discharged from the first warp outlet 312 and the second warp outlet 314, respectively, and are guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350.

  Note that the direction in which the game ball flows down in the first warp 316 and the direction in which the game ball rolls in the first stage 330 are substantially collinear, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 has little loss of kinetic energy. . That is, if the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 changes its traveling direction, kinetic energy is lost. Accordingly, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 rolls on the first stage 330 vigorously. Similarly, since the flow direction of the game ball in the second warp 318 and the rolling direction of the game ball in the second stage 350 are substantially on the same line, the game ball flowing down the second warp 318 also has a loss of kinetic energy. Few. As a result, both the game ball guided to the first stage 330 and the game ball guided to the second stage 350 roll on the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 vigorously, and each stage 330 , 350, the game balls play in each stage 330, 350, and the interest is enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is not guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 from the right side of the center accessory 300. That is, since the game balls are guided only from the left side of the center accessory 300 to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, the game balls rolling on the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 are viewed from opposite directions. Rolling is not inhibited by the guided game ball. As a result, the time spent on each stage 330, 350 becomes longer, and as a result, the game balls play in each stage 330, 350, and the interest is enhanced.

  In the vicinity of the lower frame 370 a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370, and between the effect image display device 115 and the first stage 330, a center illumination unit 302 adjacent to the effect image display device 115 is formed. A shelf-like curved surface is formed in the center electrical decoration portion 302 along the width direction of the center accessory 300, and a plurality of center decoration lamps 304 are arranged on the curved surface.

  A second start port 392 that can receive a game ball is formed at a position that is substantially in the center in the left-right direction of the center illumination unit 302 and that corresponds to the mountain portion 332 of the first stage 330. That is, the second start port 392 is provided not in the second stage 350 side, which is the flow direction of the game ball, but in the opposite direction. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392. This is because the second stage 350 is formed below the first stage 330 and a stage partition wall 364 described later is provided between the first stage 330 and the second stage 350.

  In addition, a second start port guiding groove 340 for guiding a game ball to the second start port 392 is formed in the peak portion 332 of the first stage 330. The second starting port guiding groove 340 is inclined downward from the peak portion 332 to the second starting port 392, so that the game ball is guided to the second starting port 392. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not have the momentum to roll in the vicinity of the mountain portion 332, it is easily guided to the second start port 392 by the second start port guide groove 340.

  The game ball that has won the second starting port 392 is discharged to the back of the game board 5 through a discharge path (not shown) communicating with the back of the game board 5.

  A second stage guide groove 342 for guiding a game ball to the second stage 350 is formed in the valley portion 334 of the first stage 330. The second stage guide groove 342 is inclined downward from the trough 334 to the second stage 350, whereby the game ball is guided to the second stage 350. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not have the momentum to climb over the mountain portion 332, the second stage guide groove 342 makes it easy to be guided to the second stage 350. The game ball that has lost its momentum to reciprocate between the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338 wins the third starting port 394 from the mountain portion 332. The possibility of being guided from the valley 334 to the second stage 350 is much higher than the possibility.

  Between the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, a thin plate-like stage partition wall 364 for partitioning the stages 330 and 350 is provided. The stage partition wall 364 is disposed so as to protrude upward from the surface on the first stage 330, so that a game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not flow down to the second stage 350. It has become. However, a communication portion 366 that connects the first stage 330 (specifically, the valley portion 334) and the second stage 350 is formed at a position corresponding to the valley portion 334 of the first stage 330 of the stage partition wall 364. ing. The game balls that have lost the momentum to roll to the left and right near the communication portion 366 flow down from the first stage 330 to the second stage 350 through the communication portion 366.

  A first start port guide path 374 is provided at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the second stage 350 (that is, a portion corresponding to the mountain portion 332 of the first stage 330) and a position corresponding to the hill portion 352. Thus, a first start port guide port 368 communicating with an opening 372 formed in the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 is formed. In other words, the first start port guide port 368 is provided not in the flow-down direction side of the game ball but in the opposite direction. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize that the game ball is received by the first start port guide port 368.

  The game ball guided to the first start port guide port 368 is discharged from the opening 372 onto the game board 5 through the first start port guide path 374. Here, since the first start port guide path 374 is formed so as to guide the game ball to a position directly above the first start port 390, the first start port guide path 374 is guided to the first start port guide path 374 and discharged to the game board 5 surface side. The expectation that the played game ball wins the first start opening 390 becomes very large. In addition, a nail is disposed immediately above the first start port 390, and the game balls can be received one by one in the first start port 390 by the nail. However, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 may be hindered by this nail. Therefore, the probability that the game ball discharged from the opening 372 onto the game board 5 through the first start port guiding path 374 wins the first start port 390 is about one fourth to three fourths. Become.

  The substantially central portion of the hill portion 352 in the left-right direction corresponds to the position of the first start port guide port 368 and is inclined downward from both ends of the hill portion 352 to the substantially central portion. In addition, a front inclined groove 360 for guiding a game ball to a later-described third shelf (hereinafter referred to as “third stage 376”) is formed in a substantially central portion of the hill portion 352. In addition, a first start port guide port guide groove 362 for guiding the game ball to the first start port guide port 368 is further formed inside the front inclined groove 360. That is, a front inclined groove 360 that is inclined downward from the rear to the front is formed in a substantially central portion of the hill portion 352, and the inside of the front inclined groove 360 is further inclined downward from the front to the rear. One start port guide opening guide groove 362 is formed. Thereby, the game ball that has lost the momentum to roll to the left and right in the vicinity of the front inclined groove 360 is guided to the first starting port guiding port 368 along the first starting port guiding port guiding groove 362, and the forward inclined groove 360 may flow down to the third stage 376.

  Further, a third stage 376 having a curved surface so as to draw an arc in the left-right direction is formed on the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370. The game ball can roll on the third stage 376 in the left-right direction. A front guide groove 378 that is inclined downward from the rear to the front is formed in a substantially central portion of the third stage 376 in the left-right direction. The game ball that has lost the momentum to roll from side to side in the vicinity of the front guide groove 378 flows down on the game board 5 along the front guide groove 378.

  As described above, since the first start port guide opening guide groove 362 is formed in the substantially central portion of the hill portion 352, the expectation that the game ball is guided to the first start port guide port 368 is from the peak portion 332. It becomes extremely higher than the expectation to win the 2 start opening 392. In addition, only the game balls received from the first warp inlet 306 into the center accessory 300 can be won at the second start opening 392, while the first warp inlet 306 or the second warp can be won at the first start opening 390. In addition to the game balls received from the entrance 308 in the center combination 300, the game balls flowing down the left side of the center combination 300 may be guided by the nail and win the first starting port 390. Thus, the probability that a game ball wins the first start port 390 is higher than the probability that the game ball wins the second start port 392.

  FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing the game board 5 obliquely from the front, and is a perspective view in which the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are made visible by removing the decorative cover. As shown in FIG. 12, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are formed so as to be partitioned from each other. That is, a game ball taken in from the first warp inlet 306 flows down only the first warp 316, and a game ball taken in from the second warp inlet 308 flows down only the second warp 318. Thereby, the game ball taken in from the first warp inlet 306 and the game ball taken in from the second warp inlet 308 are guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, respectively, without interfering with each other.

  Further, each of the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 is made of a transparent member so that a game ball flowing down inside can be visually recognized. Thereby, the game ball received from the 1st warp entrance 306 or the 2nd warp entrance 308 can be visually recognized. Since the player is often attracted to the center character 300 and the effect image display device 115, the player often misses that the game ball has been received at the first warp entrance 306 or the second warp entrance 308. As a result, interest was reduced. Therefore, by using the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 as transparent members, the first warp even if it is missed that the game ball has been received at the first warp inlet 306 or the second warp inlet 308. Since the game balls flowing down 316 and the second warp 318 can be visually recognized, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are disposed along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction. Specifically, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are adjacent to each other and provided along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 so that the second warp 318 is on the front side. Thereby, even if it is a narrow space, both can be arranged efficiently.

  FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing a configuration around the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. As shown in FIG. 13, an effect light source 380 is arranged behind the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. The light source 380 includes a base 382 and a plurality of LEDs 384, and the plurality of LEDs 384 are arranged on the base 382. The light source 380 (base 382 and LED 384), the decorative cover 386, and the light transmitting member 388 constitute an electric decoration member 379.

  The light emitted from the light source 380 enters the light transmission member 388, passes through the light transmission member 388 along the plane portion 3881, and is guided to the front of the game board 5. The light transmitting member 388 is a curved plate-like member and is made of a resin such as a transparent plastic. The light transmitting member 388 includes a flat portion 3881 and an end portion 3882 intersecting with the flat portion 3881. The light transmitting member 388 is disposed so that the end portion 3882 is on the front side (player side).

  The first warp 316, the second warp 318, and the light transmission member 388 are covered with a colored non-transparent decorative cover 386. Since the light transmitted through the light transmitting member 388 is guided to the decorative cover 386, the front portion of the decorative cover 386 emits light. As described above, the light transmission member 388 can guide the light emitted from the light source 380 forward to emit light linearly. In addition, since the light transmitting member 388 can guide light forward by the length in the width direction of the plane portion 3881, the degree of freedom in the position where the light source 380 is disposed is increased.

  In addition, since the decorative cover 386 is colored, it is difficult to visually recognize the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. Accordingly, the first warp visual recognition hole 3861 and the second warp so that the game ball flowing down the second warp 318 can be seen on the front surface of the decorative cover 386 so that the game ball flowing down the first warp 316 can be seen. A viewing hole 3862 is formed. Thereby, while being able to perform the effect by the colored light, the game balls flowing down the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 can be visually recognized, and the interest is enhanced.

  FIG. 14 is a view showing the positional relationship between the light transmission member 388 and the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. As shown in FIG. 14, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are attached along the flat portion 3881 of the light transmission member 388. Here, since the light emitted from the light source 380 is guided forward from the end portion 3882 of the light transmitting member 388, the path through which the game ball flows can be easily grasped by the light emitted from the light source 380.

  In addition, since the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are disposed adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction, the first light warp 316 and the second warp 318 are not provided with the light source 380 and the light transmission member 388, respectively. The game balls flowing down each of the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 can be grasped.

  Further, since the light transmitted through the light transmitting member 388 is emitted from the end portion 3882, the light can be emitted linearly. Thereby, it is possible to emit light even in a narrow place such as a place along the periphery of the center accessory 300, and a gorgeous effect can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to emit light in a frame shape as in the case where light is emitted along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300.

  Further, the flat portion 3881 is formed in a bowl shape at the end portion 3882 of the light transmitting member 388 when viewed from the front view direction. Thereby, the light transmitted through the plane portion 3881 is not guided linearly forward, but is dispersed in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the end portion 3882, so that the light emitting area becomes larger and looks more gorgeous. Enhanced.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect accessory 420 that is arranged in the game area 37 and can perform an effect using one game ball. FIG. 15 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 5 including the effect bonus 420.

  The stage effect 420 is disposed inside the center role 300 and adjacent to the right frame 370c of the frame-shaped decorative body 370, and uses a game ball received from the stage opening / closing device 398. Produce.

  The effect accessory 420 has a cylindrical accessory container 422, and a figure 424 is accommodated in the accessory container 422 as shown in FIG. The accessory container 422 is formed of a transparent member that allows a part of the circumferential direction to visually recognize the internal figure 424, and another part that is different from the part of the circumferential direction holds the internal figure 424. It is composed of an opaque member that cannot be visually recognized. However, an opening may be formed instead of the transparent member. If the figure 424 accommodated in the inside can be visually recognized, the aspect will not be limited.

  In this specification, the side on which the figure 424 can be visually recognized is referred to as an effect side area, and the side on which the figure 424 cannot be viewed is referred to as a decoration side area.

  The accessory storage body 422 is configured to be rotatable with respect to the game board 5 with the center extending in the longitudinal direction (that is, the center line of the cross section crossing the longitudinal direction of the accessory storage body 422) as the rotation center. Therefore, depending on the rotation position, the player may or may not be able to see the figure 424. That is, the figure 424 cannot be viewed when the opaque member is in front (player side) (see FIG. 10), and the figure 424 is visible when the transparent portion is in front (see FIG. 15). .

  Note that the phrase “freely rotatable with respect to the game board 5” does not mean that it is attached to the game board 5, but whether it is attached to the game board 5 or not. Can be freely rotated.

  When the figure 424 cannot be visually recognized, the character “Utahime” can be visually recognized on the front surface of the accessory container 422. This character is composed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light. Further, a light source such as an LED is disposed behind the character. When light is emitted from the light source toward the front of the game board 5, the “diva legend (decorative character)” is turned on. And the effect | action actor 420 can also be used as a decoration member by making the lighting aspect of a light source into various aspects.

  Therefore, the stage effect 420 functions as the stage role 420 when the figure 424 can be visually recognized, and functions as a decorative member when the figure 424 cannot be viewed (that is, when the decorative characters can be visually recognized). The area 5 can be used effectively, and the player can be surprised by rotating the accessory container 422, so that interest is enhanced.

  FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing the game board base 480 attached to the rear of the game board 5 from the front upper front. FIG. 17A is an enlarged front view of the game board 5. FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17B, the game ball received from the effect opening / closing device 398 is directed toward the effect accessory 420 between the effect accessory 420 and the effect opening / closing device 398. An accessory guiding path 440 for guiding is provided.

  Further, the accessory guide path 440 is inclined downward from the effect opening / closing device 398 toward the effect accessory 420 (see FIG. 16). Thereby, the game ball received by the effect opening / closing device 398 rolls on the accessory guide path 440 toward the effect accessory 420. In addition, the accessory guide path 440 is made of a transparent resin member, whereby the game ball rolling on the accessory guide path 440 can be visually recognized.

  The game ball received from the effect opening / closing device 398 is discharged behind the game ball and the game board 5 guided to the effect role 420 by the distribution mechanism 450 provided above the effect role 420. Sorted into game balls.

  FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the effect opening / closing device 398, the accessory guide path 440, the distribution mechanism 450, and the effect accessory 420 as viewed from the upper left. FIGS. 19 to 21 are plan views of the accessory guiding path 440, the distribution mechanism 450, and the effect accessory 420, and show the manner in which game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, the distribution mechanism 450 includes a solenoid 452 having a plunger 4521 that expands and contracts (moves) in the X direction and the Y direction shown in FIG. 18, and an effect opening / closing device 398 (see FIG. 18). A game ball holding member 454 that can hold only one game ball received from the above, a connection member 456 that connects the plunger 4521 and the game ball holding member 454, and a pin 458 that supports the connection member 456. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the plunger 4521 of the solenoid 452 is located on the X direction side in the normal state (that is, the demagnetized state). The game ball that has rolled on the accessory guide path 440 toward the distribution mechanism 450 is held by the game ball holding member 454.

  As shown in FIG. 20, when one game ball is held by the game ball holding member 454, the game ball that subsequently rolls on the accessory guiding path 440 cannot be held by the game ball holding member 454. The game board 5 is discharged to the rear side (Y direction side in the figure).

  As shown in FIG. 21, when the solenoid 452 is excited, the plunger moves in the Y direction. At this time, the connecting member 456 rotates counterclockwise (α direction in the figure) with the pin 458 as a fulcrum. The game ball holding member 454 rotates counterclockwise as the connecting member 456 rotates counterclockwise. A drop opening 4221 through which a game ball can be dropped is formed on the upper surface of the accessory storage body 422 of the effect accessory 420. When the solenoid 452 is excited and the game ball holding member 454 rotates counterclockwise with the connecting member 456 as a fulcrum, the game ball held by the game ball holding member 454 enters the accessory storage body 422 from the drop port 4221. Fall.

  If the solenoid 452 is in a demagnetized state, the game ball held by the game ball holding member 454 is held at a position shifted from the drop opening 4221. Therefore, the game ball held by the game ball holding member 454 is used as an accessory. It does not fall into the container 422.

  In this way, even if there are a plurality of game balls won in the effect opening / closing device 398, only one game ball is guided into the effect accessory 420 by the distribution mechanism 450. As a result, it is possible for the effect item 420 to produce an effect using one game ball.

  FIG. 22 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the accessory container 422 of the effect accessory 420. As shown in FIG. 22, a figure 424 that produces an effect using a game ball is arranged inside the accessory container 422.

  In addition to the figure 424, a first effect rod 426 and a second effect rod 428 are provided inside the accessory container 422 so that the game ball can roll. Each of the first effect rod 426 and the second effect rod 428 is made of a transparent member so that the manner in which the game ball rolls can be visually recognized.

  The figure 424 is arranged in such a manner that the one hand 4241 is pushed forward. The support shaft 430 is supported on the figure 424 directly above the one hand 4241. The support shaft 430 is an axis whose longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction. That is, the one hand 4241 and the support shaft 430 are substantially parallel. The first performance rod 426 is fixed to the one hand 4241 so as to be supported by the one hand 4241 of the figure 424 and is supported by the support shaft 430.

  The support shaft 430 is configured integrally with the one hand 4241 and the first performance rod 426 of the figure 424, and is configured to be rotatable within a predetermined angle range.

  A second effect rod 428 is disposed below the first effect rod 426. The second performance rod 428 is inclined from one end (right end 4281 in the present embodiment) to the other end (left end 4282 in the present embodiment).

  The first performance port 432 is communicated with the second effect rod 428 below the support shaft 430 and on the right end side below the support shaft 430 and on the left end side. A second effect 樋 induction port 434 is formed. In other words, the second performance 樋 guidance port 434 can guide the game ball on the first performance 樋 426 to the second performance port 436 by rolling on the second performance 樋 428. When the support shaft 430 rotates in the counterclockwise direction to the rotation limit, the left end 4262 of the first performance rod 426 is positioned above the first performance exit 432. On the other hand, when the support shaft 430 rotates in the clockwise direction to the rotation limit, the right end 4261 of the first effect rod 426 is positioned above the second effect rod guide port 434.

  In addition, a second performance exit 432 is formed immediately below the left end 4282 of the second performance rod 428. That is, the first performance port 432 and the second performance port 436 are formed side by side.

  Here, the first performance port 432 is configured in blue, and the second performance hall guide port 434 and the second performance port 436 are configured in red. Thereby, since the 2nd stage exit 436 and the 2nd stage 樋 guidance opening 434 are the same color, while performing the stage which distributes the game ball which rolls on the 1st stage bowl 426 to the right and left, the stage image display device 115 makes it possible to perform an effect of notifying which one of the first performance exit 432 and the second performance exit 436 is the winning game ball, and the interest is enhanced.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main board 500. FIG. 24 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and is a diagram mainly showing the configuration around the peripheral substrate 600. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  Control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 500 (shown in FIG. 23) and a group of peripheral boards 600 (shown in FIG. 24). The group of main boards 500 controls game operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 600 is directing actions (issued decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display and decorative body). Control).

  As shown in FIG. 23, the main board 500 includes a main control board 510 and a payout control board 520. The main control board 510 includes a CPU 511 as a central processing unit, a ROM 512 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 513 as a readable / writable memory.

  The CPU 511 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 512, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 600 or the payout control board 520.

  The RAM 513 temporarily stores information such as various data generated in various processes executed by the main control board 510 and input signals.

  The main board 500 is connected to the power supply board 195 via the power supply relay terminal plate 199 so that the operation power is supplied from the power supply board 195.

  The input interface of the main control board 510 includes a first start port sensor 580 that detects a winning state at the first start port 390, a second start port sensor 582 that detects a winning state at the second start port 392, and a second start port sensor 582. A third start port sensor 584 for detecting a winning state at the 3 start port 394 and an all winning port winning number detection sensor 586 for counting the number of winnings for all the winning ports are connected.

  In addition, the input interface of the main control board 510 indicates that the game ball has won the gate sensor 560 for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 402 and the general winning opening 404 through the panel relay terminal board 550. A general winning opening sensor 562 to be detected is connected.

  Furthermore, an effect opening / closing device count sensor 570 is connected to the input interface of the main control board 510 via an effect opening / closing device relay terminal plate 552 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 550 and connected to the panel relay terminal plate 550. The jackpot gaming switchgear count sensor 576 is connected via the jackpot gaming switchgear relay terminal plate 554.

  Detection signals from the sensors are input to the main control board 510. Also connected to the input interface of the main control board 510 are an inner frame opening switch 536 for detecting the opening state of the front frame body 11 and a door opening switch 538 for detecting the opening state of the front frame 4.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display board 568 is connected to the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 550 via a symbol limiting resistor board 566. From the main control board 510, the normal symbol display 82, first symbol A drive signal can be output to the special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86.

  In addition, an output opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 578 for driving the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398 is connected to the output interface of the effect opening / closing device relay terminal board 552, and these are driven from the main control board 510. A signal is output.

  Further, the output interface of the jackpot game opening / closing device relay terminal plate 554 drives the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 574 that drives the pair of movable pieces 396 of the third start port 394 and the door 4002 of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. A jackpot gaming opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 572 is connected, and these drive signals are output from the main control board 510.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 520 includes a CPU 522 as a central processing unit, a ROM 524 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 526 as a readable / writable memory.

  The payout control board 520 processes the command signal input from the main control board 510 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 and the launch motor 192 connected to the launch control board 532. Thereby, the ball payout device 170 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the firing motor 192 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  Note that bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 510 and the payout control board 520 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 510 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 520 to the main control board 510.

  The payout control board 520 is also connected with a lower pan full switch 530 for detecting that the game balls stored in the lower plate 31 are full. “Please remove from the dish 31” is notified.

  In addition, an external terminal board 534 is connected to the main control board 510 and the payout control board 520, and the winning statuses of the start ports 390, 392, 394 and the opening / closing devices 398, 400, normal symbols / special symbols are displayed. Various information such as the game state based on the fluctuating state and the lottery result is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the game facility.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 600 includes a peripheral control substrate 610 and a display device control substrate 116 as shown in FIG. Note that only one-way communication is performed between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main control board 510 and the peripheral control board 610, and the main control board 510 and the peripheral control board 610. The command is sent to, but the reverse is not done. Also, power for operation is supplied from the power supply board 195 to the peripheral board 600 via the power supply relay terminal plate 199.

  The peripheral control board 610 also includes electronic components such as a CPU 611, ROM 612, and RAM 613, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 610 is provided with a ROM 619 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 618 that outputs the sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 619. It has been.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 610 and the display device control board 116 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect image display device 115 is connected to the display device control board 116, and the display device control board 116 processes a command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 610. Then, a drive signal is output to the effect image display device 115. More specifically, the display device control board 116 includes a CPU 632, a RAM 634, a ROM 636, a VDP 638, and an image ROM 639.

  The CPU 632 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 610 via the input / output interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 638. The RAM 634 provides a work area for the CPU 632 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 636 holds a program for the CPU 632 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 638 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect image display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 638, and can hold the operation mode of the VDP 638, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 632 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the effect image display device 115 can be changed variously. As a result, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 (determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704) or the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 (the second special symbol) received by the command receiving means 750 described later. It is possible to derive and display the determination result by the symbol appropriateness determination means 714 and display a predetermined effect image. The image ROM 639 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  In addition, a lamp driving board 650 and a frame decoration relay terminal board 640 are connected to the peripheral control board 610. Further, a center decoration driving unit relay terminal plate 662 is connected to the lamp driving substrate 650 as a relay terminal plate. Further, a rotating unit lower LED board 664 is connected to the center decoration driving unit relay terminal plate 662.

  In the input interface of the rotating unit lower LED board 664, the game ball used for the production (that is, the game ball that has rolled the first production pole 426) is either the first performance outlet 432 or the second performance outlet 432. A ball sorter motor sensor 666 is connected to detect whether the ball is accepted. Also connected to the output interface of the rotating unit lower LED board 664 are a ball sorting motor 668 that repeatedly rotates the support shaft 430 clockwise and counterclockwise, and a rotating unit LED board 670 in which LEDs are arranged as electrical decorations. Has been.

  Further, the output interface of the lamp driving board 650 includes a panel decoration lamp 652, a center decoration lamp 304, a rotation motor 658 for rotating the effect accessory 420, and a rotation unit for detecting the rotation position of the effect accessory 420. A motor sensor 660 is connected. Thereby, the lamp drive board 650 can switch the lighting state of each of these lamps, and can detect the rotation operation and the rotation position of the effect accessory 420. Further, a discharge port detection sensor 654 for detecting a game ball discharged to the rear side of the game board 5 is connected to the input interface of the lamp driving board 650.

  The frame decoration relay terminal plate 640 connected to the peripheral control board 610 is connected to the speakers 18 and 57 connected to the front frame 4, the effect selection switch 60, the frame decoration lamp 642, and the like. In 610, the effect mode output to the effect image display device 115 is switched based on the operation state of the effect selection switch 60, and a drive signal is output to the speakers 18, 57 and the frame decoration lamp 642.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a functional block diagram schematically showing a functional configuration of the peripheral control board 610 in the main control board 510 and the peripheral board 600.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the main control board 510 includes a first special symbol lottery means 700, a first special symbol display control means 502, a first special symbol hold display control means 732, and a first special symbol hold counter 703. Second special symbol lottery means 710, second special symbol display control means 504, second special symbol hold display control means 730, second special symbol hold counter 713, hold order storage means 740, normal symbol Lottery means 720, jackpot game execution means 515, small hit game execution means 514, opening / closing operation control means 738, probability variation game execution means 734, normal symbol lottery means 720, normal symbol display control means 516, normal Symbol hold display control means 518, normal symbol hold counter 723, time-short game execution means 736, third start opening / closing control means 728, command sender And a 746.

  The first special symbol lottery means 700 extracts random numbers by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 when a game ball wins the first starting opening 390 and is detected by the first starting opening sensor 580. The extracted random numbers are held up to a first predetermined number (for example, 4) by the hold order storage means 740. When the hold by the hold order storage unit 740 is released, the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 determines whether or not the long win, short win or small win is won. The determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is a normal symbol normal time determination table stored in the ROM 512 and the random number value obtained by the first special symbol determination random number extraction means 702 in the normal gaming state. 706, and in the probability variation gaming state, based on the random number value obtained by the first special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 702 and the special symbol probability variation per-time determination table 708 stored in the ROM 512. Done.

  In this embodiment, “long hit” is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed by the jackpot game execution means 515 for 15 rounds, and “short hit” is opened / closed by the jackpot game execution means 515. A game in which the opening / closing operation of the device 397 is executed for two rounds. The “small hit” is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed twice by the small hit game execution means 514. Note that the operation mode of the opening / closing device 397 is the same for the short win and the small hit, but when the short win is won, the probability changing function is operated by the probability changing game executing means 734 (that is, the probability changing game state is changed). However, the probability variation function does not work when winning a small hit.

  By the way, when the winning per winning is won, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is continuously executed for 15 rounds, whereby a long winning game in which a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out is performed. In addition, when winning a short win, a short win game is performed in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is continuously executed for two rounds. After the short hit game ends, a probability change game state by the probability change game execution means 734 occurs.

  The second special symbol lottery means 710 receives the second special symbol when the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 and is detected by the second starting port sensor 582 or the third starting port sensor 584. A random number is extracted by the hit determination random number extraction means 712. The extracted random number is held by the second special symbol holding counter 713 up to a second predetermined number (for example, four). Then, when the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is released, it is determined by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 whether or not the long win, short win or small win is won. The determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a normal symbol normal time determination table stored in the ROM 512 and the random number value obtained by the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 in the normal gaming state. 706, and in the case of the probability variation gaming state, based on the random number value obtained by the second special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 712 and the special symbol probability variation per-time determination table 708 stored in the ROM 512. Done.

  The order in which the game balls are detected by the first start port sensor 580, the second start port sensor 582, and the third start port sensor 584 is stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131, which will be described later, by the holding order storage means 740. Then, the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 perform lottery one by one based on the order stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131. That is, based on the order stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is determined to win the long win, the short win or the small win. It is determined one by one. In addition, the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 is the first special symbol hold counter 703 or the second special symbol when a predetermined release condition is established, for example, a variation condition is established. This is done by releasing the hold by the hold counter 713.

  The determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 by the first special symbol display control unit 502. The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is displayed on the first special symbol hold display 88 by the first special symbol hold display control means 732.

  The determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 is displayed on the second special symbol display 86 by the second special symbol display control unit 504. Further, the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is displayed on the second special symbol hold display 90 by the second special symbol hold display control means 730.

  The jackpot game execution means 515 and the jackpot game execution means 514 execute the jackpot game or the jackpot game based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Specifically, when it is determined that the long win is won, the long hit game is executed by the jackpot game execution means 515, and when it is determined that the short win is won, the short hit game is executed by the big hit game execution means 515. When it is determined that the small hit is won, the small hit game executing means 514 executes the small hit game. In the present embodiment, “long win and short win” are collectively referred to as “big hit”, and “long win game and short win game” are collectively referred to as “big hit game”.

  In the present embodiment, the long hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 are performed over a total of 15 rounds. Specifically, after the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 738 for two rounds, the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is continued by the opening / closing operation control means 738 for 12 rounds, and is continuously performed. This is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed again for one round by the opening / closing operation control means 738. The short hit game is a game in which only the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 738 for two rounds, and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is not performed. The small hit game is a game in which only the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed twice by the opening / closing operation control means 738.

  As described above, when the long hit game is executed, the number of opening / closing operations of the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is executed more than the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398, and the short hit game and the small hit game are executed. The number of opening / closing operations of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed more than the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400.

  The opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by operating the effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 578 by the opening / closing operation control means 738, and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 738. This is done by operating a jackpot game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 572.

  Specifically, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a long win, the opening / closing operation control means 738 performs the opening / closing device for effects. The opening / closing solenoid 578 is operated to open / close the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398. From the 3rd round to the 14th round, the opening / closing operation control means 738 operates the jackpot gaming opening / closing solenoid 572 to open / close the door opening / closing door 4002 of the jackpot gaming opening / closing apparatus 400. Further, for only 15 rounds, the opening / closing operation opening / closing solenoid 578 is operated by the opening / closing operation control means 738 to open / close the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398. On the other hand, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short hit, the opening / closing operation control means 738 activates the effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 578, The operation of opening and closing the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed only for two rounds.

  When a game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the number of winning balls is counted by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 570 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device count sensor 576. In addition, when a game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the winning game ball is detected by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 570 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device count sensor 576. In response, a game ball is paid out as a prize ball by the ball payout device 170.

  If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a small hit, the opening / closing operation control means 738 causes the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid for performance to be played. The operation of opening and closing the opening / closing door 4002 of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 by operating 578 is performed twice.

  In the present embodiment, opening and closing of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed depending on whether the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short win or small win. The operation mode is the same. However, in the case of short wins, the game state after the short win game ends becomes a so-called “probability game state” in which the probability of winning a big win is high, but in the case of a small win, the small hit game has ended. The game state remains a normal game state that is not a game state of any one of the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 3982 is performed two rounds or twice, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the winning is a short hit or a small hit, but thereafter, the first special symbol lottery is performed. The probability of winning the jackpot varies depending on the means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. Thereby, the player cannot discriminate whether the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the normal gaming state, and the interest is enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing operation processing of the effect opening / closing device 398 (specifically, the effect opening / closing device) when the long hit game is executed, when the short hit game is executed, and when the small hit game is executed The number of open / close operations 398) is shared. Thereby, the data amount of ROM 512 of main control board 510 can be reduced. In particular, when the short hit game is executed and when the small hit game is executed, the opening / closing time of the effect opening / closing device 398 is also shared, so that the tables of the short hit game and the small hit game are shared. As a result, the data amount of the ROM 512 can be reduced.

  Here, “round” means that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses and a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls wins when a long winning game and a short winning game are executed. It means a unit in which the opening / closing device for effect 398 or the opening / closing device for jackpot game 400 is opened / closed by satisfying any of the conditions. Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 when the small hit game is being executed is not referred to as “round”. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per round in the short hit game is much longer than the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 and the big hit game opening / closing device 400 per round in the long hit game. It is a short time. Note that the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per time in the small hit game is substantially the same as the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per round in the short hit game.

  The probability variation game execution means 734 is a probability variation game that increases the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 in the game after the long hit game or the short hit game is executed. Execute. Specifically, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol validity determination unit 704 and the second special symbol validity determination unit 714 is performed based on the special symbol probability change time determination table 708, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, “probability change game” means that the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determine whether or not the special symbol probability change time determination table 708 and special symbol probability change time, respectively. It means a game played based on the hit determination table 708. A gaming state in which a probability variation game is being performed is referred to as a “probability variation gaming state”. Here, the special symbol probability change per hour determination table 708 is set to have a higher probability of winning per long and short than the special symbol normal per hour determination table 706.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the long winning game is executed by the first special symbol determination unit 704 or the second special symbol determination unit 714, for example, after the long winning game is executed, for example, one half. If the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determines that the short win game is executed, the probability change will occur with a probability of 100%. It becomes a gaming state. On the other hand, when it is determined that a small hit is made by the first special symbol success / failure determining means 704 or the second special symbol appropriate / bad determination means 714, the game state is changed after the small hit game executing means 514 is executed. There is nothing.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 402 and is detected by the gate sensor 560, the normal symbol lottery means 720 extracts a random number by the normal symbol per-determination random number extracting means 722. The extracted random numbers are held up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by the normal symbol hold counter 723. When the normal symbol hold counter 723 releases the hold, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment means 724 determines whether or not the hold is made. The determination by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 is based on the random number value acquired by the random number extraction means for normal symbol determination 722 and the normal symbol normal time determination table 726 stored in the ROM 512 in the normal gaming state. If the game is in the short-time gaming state, it is performed based on the random number value obtained by the random number extraction means 722 for determining the normal symbol per symbol and the determination table 727 for the normal symbol short-time per hour stored in the ROM 512.

  The normal symbol display control means 516 displays the determination result by the normal symbol appropriate / impossible determination means 724 on the normal symbol display 82. Further, the number of holds by the normal symbol hold counter 723 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 518.

  The short time game execution means 736 executes the short time game in which the lottery time is shortened in the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720. In the probability variation game state, a time-short game by the time-short game execution unit 736 may be performed together with the probability variation game by the probability variation game execution unit 734.

  In the present embodiment, the “short-time gaming state” means a gaming state in which the normal symbol winning / non-winning determination unit 724 determines whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate based on the normal symbol short-time / hit determination table 727. Here, the normal symbol time per hour determination table 727 is set so that the lottery time is shorter than the normal symbol normal time per hour determination table 726. It should be noted that the normal symbol normal hour determination table 726 and the normal symbol short time determination table 727 both have a winning probability set as high as 90%, for example. Accordingly, when the normal symbol determination unit 724 determines whether the normal symbol is appropriate or not based on the normal symbol short-time hit determination table 727, the pair of movable pieces 396 are frequently opened and closed, and the third start port 394 is opened and closed. It becomes easy to win a game ball. When a game ball wins at the third start port 394, the game ball is paid out by the ball payout device 170, so that it is possible to play the game without reducing the game balls as much as possible during the short-time game state.

  Here, the lottery in the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 will be described with reference to Tables 1 and 2. Table 1 is a table showing winning probabilities and random numbers. Table 2 is a table for determining the type of jackpot game when the jackpot is won.

  As shown in Table 1, one of the 631 random numbers from 0 to 630 is extracted by the random number extracting means 702 for determination per first special symbol and the random number extracting means 712 for determination per second special symbol. First, it is determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 based on Table 1 whether or not the extracted random number value is won. Specifically, first, the gaming state is determined. If the gaming state is the normal gaming state, 7 and 317 are random numbers, and if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, 7, 37, 67, 97, 127, 157. , 187, 217, 247, 277, 307, 337, 367, 397, 427, 457, 487, 517, 547, 577 are jackpot random numbers. Note that the same table is used according to the gaming state in the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the hit determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. That is, when the determination of winning by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is performed using the special symbol probability change per-time determination table 708, the determination of winning by the second special symbol probability change determination means 714 is also performed at the time of special symbol probability change. When the winning determination table 708 is used and the winning determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is performed using the first special symbol normal time winning determination table 706, the second special symbol determination determination is made. The determination of winning by means 714 is also performed using the first special symbol normal hour determination table 706.

  Then, if it is determined that the extracted random number is a jackpot random number, the type of jackpot is determined based on Table 2. A jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot is played. The types of jackpots include long hits where the jackpot game is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and short hits where the jackpot game is short. In the long win, the per jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "long win game" corresponding to the long win) is a "probable change short short length" in which both the probabilistic gaming state and the short-time gaming state occur, There is a “ordinary long hit” in which only the short-time gaming state occurs (the probability variation gaming state does not occur) after the end of the long hitting game. For short wins, after the jackpot game (hereinafter, the jackpot game corresponding to the short win is referred to as “short win game”), only a probable game state occurs (no short-time game state occurs). In addition, there is “probability short shortening short chance” in which both a probability change gaming state and a time saving gaming state occur after the short winning game ends.

  On the other hand, if the random number extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extraction means 702 and the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 is not a winning random number, whether or not a small hit is won is displayed. 1 is determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Specifically, regardless of the gaming state, 16, 92, 133, 321, 465, 501, 568, and 610 are small random numbers. When it is determined that the extracted random number is a small hit random number, the small hit game execution means 514 executes the small hit game. As described above, according to Table 1, the winning probability for jackpot is 2/631, and the winning probability for jackpot is 8/631.

  In this way, even if the jackpot is not won, it can be expected to win the jackpot. In addition, since the probability of winning the jackpot is set higher than the probability of winning the jackpot, every time a player wins the jackpot, the player always feels that he has won the jackpot. It can have, and can suppress the fall of interest. Furthermore, since the player will continue to play the game, it will also benefit the hall where the operating rate of the pachinko machine is improved. In addition, in response to the random numbers extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 or the second special symbol determination random number extracting means 712, the big win winning is determined prior to the small winning winning determination. The In other words, if the winning of the small win is first, the winning determination of the big win will not be performed if the winning of the small win is made, but the determination of the big win is made prior to the determination of the small win winning as in this embodiment. If the winning is determined, the jackpot winning is always performed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the determination of the big win is made only when the big win is not won, the big win and the small win do not overlap. If the big win and the small win are duplicated, it will be necessary to decide which one will be the winner and it will be complicated in terms of control, but the big win was not won as in this embodiment. The control load can be reduced by making a determination of winning a small hit only occasionally. In addition, two lottery opportunities for jackpot determination and small hit determination are given, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the tables used for the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 do not necessarily need to be the same table. The first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 704 Different tables may be used for each of the determination units 714. Even in such a case, if the probability variation gaming state, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 both use the probability variation gaming state table, and the normal gaming state For example, it is preferable that a table for a normal gaming state is used for both the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Thereby, even if the starting opening where a game ball wins is different, the same gaming state is obtained, so that the game is not complicated, and consequently, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the determination result of the first special symbol determination unit 704, the second special symbol determination unit 714, and the normal symbol determination unit 724 does not necessarily include a deviation. For example, if the small hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed for a very short time, if the big hit is not won, all may be won.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot has been won, and when determining whether or not the jackpot is won when the jackpot is not won, a remarkable effect is brought about. In addition, it may be drawn in a lump on whether or not the big win and the small win are won.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when winning is made per short length of probability change in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710, the game state after the game per probability length short length is finished is surely changed. Although the gaming state is entered, it can be understood from the display mode on the effect image display device 115 that the gaming state at this time is the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when winning for short-term probability change shortage, the gaming state after the short-term probability short-term game ends becomes a certain-variable gaming state. At this time, the effect image indicates that the gaming state is a certain-variable gaming state. It cannot be grasped from the display mode on the display device 115. That is, the display mode of the effect image display device 115 in the probability change game state after the short game with the probability change time is finished and the display mode of the effect image display device 115 in the normal game state are the same or substantially the same display mode. is there. Here, “substantially the same display mode” may be the same as long as the player cannot grasp whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  The third start opening / closing control means 728 operates the normal electric accessory solenoid 574 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 396 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol determination unit 724 is successful. When the pair of movable pieces 396 opens and closes, it becomes easy for a game ball to win a prize at the third start port 394. When the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the closed state, it is impossible to win a game ball in the third start port 394, or a game ball win in the third start port 394 is the first start. Although it is more difficult than winning a game ball to the mouth 390 and the second starting port 392, when the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the open state, the winning of the game ball to the third starting port 394 is as follows. It becomes easier than winning a game ball to the start port 390 and the second start port 392. In the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 is configured more difficult than the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390.

  The command transmission unit 746 transmits the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 714 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral board 600. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to an effect time or the like performed in the effect image display device 115.

  The peripheral control board 610 includes command receiving means 750, effect lottery means 760, effect accessory operation executing means 762, and effect opening / closing device state display control means 764.

  The command receiving means 750 receives the lottery result and the information related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 510 by the first special symbol acceptability judging means 704 or the second special symbol acceptability judging means 714.

  The effect lottery means 760 determines by lottery whether or not the effect by the effect item 420 is performed. As a result of the lottery by the effect lottery means 760, when it is determined that the effect by the effect object 420 is to be performed, the effect lottery means 760 uses the lamp drive board 650 and the center decoration drive part relay terminal plate 662 to distribute the ball distribution unit. The motor 668 is operated to produce an effect by the effect item 420. However, since the effect by the effect accessory 420 is performed using the game ball won in the effect opening / closing device 398 (the effect opening / closing device 398), when the game ball does not win the effect opening / closing device 398. No such production is performed.

  The effect accessory operation executing means 762 controls the effect agent 420 via the lamp driving board 650 such as rotational driving of the effect agent 420.

  The stage opening / closing device state display control means 764 controls the display mode of the stage opening / closing device state display lamp 651 via the lamp driving board 650. Specifically, when the opening / closing operation control means 738 operates the jackpot gaming opening / closing apparatus opening / closing solenoid 572 to open / close the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing apparatus 398, such information is transmitted by the command transmission means 746 to the peripheral control board. 610 is transmitted. Information transmitted from the command transmission unit 746 to the peripheral control board 610 is received by the command reception unit 750.

  When the command receiving means 750 receives information related to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398, the effect opening / closing device state display control means 764 causes the effect opening / closing device state display lamp via the lamp driving board 650. The display mode of 651 is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, when information indicating that the effect opening / closing device 398 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the operation of the opening / closing door 3982 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 610 by the command transmitting unit 746, the effect opening / closing device is performed. Display control is performed so that the status display lamp 651 displays green. When information indicating that the effect opening / closing device 398 is changed from the open state to the closed state by the operation of the opening / closing door 3982 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 610 by the command transmitting unit 746, the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is displayed. Is controlled to display in red. That is, display control of the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398 is controlled to be green when it is open, and red when it is closed.

  As described above, the effect opening / closing device state display control means 764 causes the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 to be switched between when the effect opening / closing device 398 is in the open state and when it is closed by the opening / closing operation control means 738. Display control is performed in different display modes. Thereby, since the opening / closing state of the effect opening / closing device 398 can be grasped, the player cannot grasp that the effect opening / closing device 398 is open even though the effect opening / closing device 398 is open, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the inability to aim the game ball at the effect opening / closing device 398.

  In particular, in this embodiment, during the jackpot game, there are cases where the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 opens and closes and the effect opening / closing device 398 opens and closes, and it is difficult to know which game ball to win. . In particular, in the case where a stage opening / closing device 398 is provided in addition to the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 provided conventionally, the player wins a game ball in the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 during the jackpot gaming. Try to let them. Therefore, when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened instead of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the player feels confused, cannot know where to win the game ball, and is less interesting. In addition, an effect opening / closing device 398 is provided upstream of the effect image display device 115 in the flow direction of the game ball, and the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398 intersects the board surface of the game board 5. When it is movable in the direction, the operation of the open / close door 3982 is difficult to grasp as viewed from the player. Therefore, a situation may occur in which a game ball is missed by winning the effect opening / closing device 398 even though the effect opening / closing device 398 is in an open state. Accordingly, the display opening / closing device 398 is opened when the display opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is controlled to be displayed in different display modes when the display opening / closing device 398 is open and when it is closed. In spite of the fact, it is possible to avoid the game opening / closing device 398 from winning a game ball and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is provided so as to be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398, the player only has to hit a game ball aiming at a place emitting green light. Thus, even if the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided in a place where the position is difficult to grasp, such as above the effect image display device 115 as in the present embodiment, the player can aim for the game ball Since it is possible to grasp whether or not it should be entered, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that “the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is provided so as to be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398” means that the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is provided in the effect opening / closing device 398. For example, as in the present embodiment, the back wall in the production opening / closing device 398 is a transparent member, and the inside of the production opening / closing device 398 is lit from behind the transparent member. Also good. That is, it is only necessary that the inside of the effect opening / closing device 398 can be displayed. Further, “within the effect opening / closing device 398” means a region downstream of the opening / closing door 3982 in the flow direction of the game ball.

  Further, since an opening is formed on the front side of the stage winning prize opening 3981 when viewed from the player, a game ball received in the stage winning prize opening 3981 is attached to a glass plate attached to the window frame 39. Can be visually recognized. Thereby, it can be ascertained that the game ball has been received in the stage prize winning opening 3981. In this way, the opening and closing of the jackpot game is achieved by the synergistic effect of being able to grasp that the game ball can be received in the stage winning prize opening 3981 and being able to grasp that the game ball has been received in the stage prize winning opening 3981. Even if the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided separately from the device 400 and the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened in place of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the display opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is displayed in green when the display opening / closing device 398 is in the open state, and is displayed in red when the display opening / closing device 398 is in the closed state. However, the mode is not limited as long as it is possible to grasp whether the production opening / closing device 398 is in the open state or the closed state. For example, the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 may be controlled to be turned off when the effect opening / closing device 398 is in a closed state, and may be controlled to be turned on when the effect opening / closing device 398 is in an open state.

[About the operation of the director for the production]
FIG. 26A, which will be described based on FIGS. 24 to 26, is a front view showing the internal configuration of the accessory storage body 422 of the effect accessory 420, and the first effect 樋 426 is the first performance outlet. It is a figure which shows inclining below toward 432. FIG. FIG. 26 (b) is a front view showing the internal configuration of the accessory container 422 of the effect accessory 420, and the first effect 樋 426 is inclined downward toward the second effect 樋 induction port 434. FIG.

  First, in the lamp drive board 650, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or reset, it is confirmed whether or not the detection signal of the rotary motor sensor 660 that detects the rotation position of the effecting instrument 420 is received. If there is no detection signal from the rotating part motor sensor 660, the effect accessory 420 is driven to rotate to a position where the inside of the accessory container 422 of the effect accessory 420 cannot be visually recognized. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, “Diva legend” appears in front of the effect item 420.

  Thereafter, in accordance with the change in the gaming state, a control command for rotationally controlling the effect accessory 420 from the peripheral control board 610 (specifically, the effect accessory action execution means 762) to the lamp drive board 650 is issued. When transmitted, the lamp driving board 650 drives the rotary motor 658 so that the figure 424 inside the accessory container 422 of the effect accessory 420 can be seen as shown in FIG. The effect accessory 420 is driven to rotate. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the figure 424 arranged inside the accessory storage body 422 of the effect accessory 420. Further, when the game ball received from the effect opening / closing device 398 is led to the first effect rod 426, the effect using the game ball can be visually recognized.

  When the control command for effect driving control is transmitted from the peripheral control board 610 to the lamp driving board 650 by using the figure 424, the lamp driving board 650 causes the support shaft 430 to move in the β direction. And reciprocally rotate in the γ direction.

  When the support shaft 430 is repeatedly reciprocated in the β direction and the γ direction, the one hand 4241 of the figure 424 rotates around the support shaft 430 with respect to the figure 424 as the support shaft 430 rotates. That is, when the support shaft 430 rotates clockwise (β direction in the figure), the one hand 4241 and the first effect rod 426 are rotated in the β direction with respect to the figure 424 with the support shaft 430 as the rotation center. To do. Further, when the support shaft 430 rotates counterclockwise (γ direction in the drawing), the one hand 4241 and the first effect rod 426 move in the γ direction with respect to the figure 424 with the support shaft 430 as the rotation center. Rotate. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the first effect 樋 426 is inclined downward toward the first performance exit 432, and the first effect 樋 426 is shown in FIG. 26 (b). Are repeatedly inclined downward toward the second performance 樋 induction port 434.

  If a game ball that has won the effect opening / closing device 398 is present on the first effect cage 426, the support shaft 430 is repeatedly reciprocated clockwise and counterclockwise, so that the game ball is Roll on the 1 stage 樋 426 in the left-right direction. In other words, the support shaft 430 rotates in the opposite direction different from the previous rotation direction before the game ball of the first performance rod 426 is guided to the first performance port 432 or the second performance rod guide port 434. As a result, the game ball rolls on the first effect rod 426 in the left-right direction. When the support shaft 430 rotates to the rotation limit in the γ direction and is held for a certain period of time (if it is held for a certain period of time in the mode of FIG. 26A), the game ball is guided to the first performance port 432. . On the other hand, when the support shaft 430 rotates to the rotation limit in the clockwise direction and is held for a certain time (when held for a certain time in the mode of FIG. Led to.

  When a game ball that rolls on the first performance pole 426 is guided to the first performance exit 432, the game ball is discharged behind the game board 5. On the other hand, when a game ball that rolls on the first effect rod 426 is guided to the second effect rod guide port 434, the game ball falls on the right end 4281 of the second effect rod 428, and from the right end 4281 to the left end 4282. Roll towards Then, the game ball rolling from the right end 4281 toward the left end 4282 is guided to the second performance outlet 432.

  That is, when the support shaft 430 is repeatedly reciprocated in the β direction and the γ direction, the first stage 樋 426 is a game ball that rolls on the first stage 樋 426 as the first stage 432 or the second stage. It swings like a seesaw so as to be guided to one of the ports 436. As a result, only one game ball rolls on the first performance bowl 426 that is swung like a seesaw, so that it is likely to be accepted by the first performance outlet 432 or the second performance outlet 436. Sometimes, the player will feel a sense of thrill, and the excitement will be enhanced.

  Note that the distribution mechanism 450 distributes only one game ball to the effect object 420 even when a plurality of game balls are received from the effect opening / closing device 398. There is only one game ball rolling in a seesaw shape.

  In addition, an effect by the effect object 420 using the game ball (that is, an effect such as whether the game ball is accepted by the first performance exit 432 or the second performance exit 432) is command transmission means 746. Is performed based on the lottery result received by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714.

  Specifically, when performing an effect by the effect object 420, which one of the first performance exit 432 and the first performance 樋 426 is to be the winning performance exit (or an outage performance exit)? The production lottery means 760 determines this. On the other hand, the effect image display device 115 performs an effect suggesting which one of the first performance exit 432 and the second performance exit 436 is a winning game ball. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp which one of the first performance outlet 432 and the second performance outlet 436 is a win if the game ball is led. Therefore, since the player can easily grasp which stage is the winning stage when the stage is performed by the stage effect 420, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  When the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a short hit or a small hit, a game ball rolling on the first performance pole 426 is hit. The stage is directed so that it is led to the stage of the stage and the side of the stage that has been decided. On the other hand, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is out of play, the game ball rolling on the first performance pole 426 is out of play. The performance is performed so as to be guided to the determined exit. In this way, the winning lottery means 760 determines the winning performance exit and the off-performing performance exit for each performance by the production effect 420. In other words, the winning performance outlet and the extraordinary performance outlet are variable. Thereby, a monotonous game can be avoided, and when a performance is performed by the performance object 420, the player is drawn attention to which performance exit is a hit, and the interest is enhanced.

  In addition, “winning performance exit” means a performance exit indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means may be advantageous to the player, and “out of performance exit” means the lottery means. It is a performance exit that shows that the lottery result by is more unfavorable than the result advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, “the lottery result by the lottery means may be a result advantageous to the player” means “short win or short in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710”. It means “winning the jackpot”. That is, “possibility” means that if the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a short hit, a probable game state is generated, which is advantageous to the player. Can do. In addition, if it is a small hit, it is based on the fact that it cannot be said that the result is advantageous to the player because the normal gaming state continues.

  In addition, the effect using the game ball by the effect object 420 is when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short win or small hit, This is performed after a series of opening / closing operations (two opening / closing operations in the present embodiment) of the effect opening / closing device 398 by the opening / closing operation control means 738 is completed. Specifically, after the short win game and the small hit game are executed, the symbols of the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 after the occurrence of the next gaming state are changing (the first special symbol display). This is performed after the lighting / flashing display of the symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is started until the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is displayed. In this specification, the time required for symbol variation is referred to as variation time.

  The game balls that have won the effect opening / closing device 398 at the timing when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened and held are held by the distribution mechanism 450 until the effect by the effect acting 420 is performed. Is dropped from the drop opening 4221 to the accessory container 422 at the timing when the production is performed.

  It should be noted that it takes a certain amount of time to produce an effect using the game ball by the effect object 420. On the other hand, when the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is not accompanied by a so-called reach effect, the variation time varies depending on the number of reservations by the first special symbol reservation counter 703, as will be described in detail later. For example, if the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 immediately after the start of fluctuation is 2 or more, the change time is relatively short. If the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 1 or less, the first special symbol is set. The fluctuation time is longer than when the number of holds by the hold counter 703 is 2 or more. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time in the reach production and the fluctuation time in the case where the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is 1 or less are longer than the time required for the production using the game balls by the production actor 420. It has become. On the other hand, the fluctuation time when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 2 or more is shorter than the time required for the play using the game ball by the play accessory 420. When the determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 is derived on the second special symbol display 86, the variation time is longer than the time required for the effect using the game ball by the effect agent 420. Always getting longer. Therefore, for the effect using the game ball by the effect agent 420, if the determination result by the first special symbol determination means 704 is derived on the first special symbol display 84, the reach occurs and the second It is executed only when the number of holds by the 1 special symbol hold counter 703 is 1 or less, and is always executed if the determination result by the second special symbol presence / absence determination means 714 is derived to the second special symbol display 86. .

  On the other hand, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is long hit, the effect using the game ball by the effect accessory 420 is 15 rounds or more. To be done. Here, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed by the opening / closing operation control means 738 up to two rounds, and the game winning the effect opening / closing device 398 at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed. All the balls are discharged behind the pachinko machine 1 by the sorting mechanism 450. After the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed for two rounds, the opening / closing operation control means 738 continues the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 until the 14th round. Since the opening / closing operation of the device 398 is not performed, a game ball cannot be received in the effect opening / closing device 398. Then, after the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is executed, the opening / closing operation control unit 738 executes the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 again only for the first round of the 15th round. The game balls received in the effect opening / closing device 398 in the 15th round are held by the distribution mechanism 450 until the effect using the game balls by the effect actor 420 is started. It falls from the drop opening 4221 to the accessory container 422 at the timing when the performance is performed.

  Here, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is long hit, the timing at which the effect using the game ball by the effect accessory 420 is performed. As described above, it is after the 15th round in the long game. Specifically, it is performed at any timing from when a game ball is won to the effect opening / closing device 398 until a game state that occurs after the end of the long hit game is started. Therefore, if, for example, a probability variation game state occurs after the long hit game, an effect using the game ball by the effect agent 420 is performed at least before the probability variation game state occurs.

  Further, in the effect image display device 115, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short win or small win, and after the long hit gaming state occurs Special effects are performed before the next gaming state occurs. Thereby, when a special effect is performed on the effect image display device 115, the player has a high expectation that a jackpot gaming state will occur, and the interest will be enhanced.

  As described above, the game ball rolling on the first performance pole 426 is changed to the first performance exit 432 or the first special symbol determination unit 704 or the second special symbol determination unit 714 according to the determination of the lottery result. The performance is performed so as to be guided to the second performance exit 436. When a special effect is performed in the effect image display device 115, the game ball rolling on the first effect 樋 426 is guided to the winning performance outlet, and the effect image display device 115 performs the special effect. If not, guide to the off-stage exit. Therefore, when an effect by the effect agent 420 is being performed, the player plays a game with a sense of expectation that the game ball will be received at the winning performance exit.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 714 is a short win or a small hit, the game opening / closing device 398 is played with a game ball. If is not accepted, the effect using the game ball is not performed. Therefore, when the effect opening / closing device 398 of the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened, the player is willing to win a game ball in the effect opening / closing device 398 for any reason. Thereby, it is possible not only to see the unilateral performance from the pachinko machine 1, but also to have an emotion that the player himself participates in the game, and the interest is enhanced. Furthermore, since the accessory guide path 440, the first effect kite 426, and the second effect kite 428 are all made of a transparent member so that the game balls rolling on them can be seen, the game balls produce the effect. Since it is possible to grasp a series of trends from winning the opening / closing device 398 to being accepted by the first performance outlet 432 or the second performance outlet 432, the interest is further enhanced.

  Note that the members of the accessory guide path 440, the first effect rod 426, and the second effect rod 428 may be transparent to such an extent that the game balls rolling on them can be visually recognized. That is, a semi-transparent member may be used as long as it can visually recognize the rolling game ball.

[Display area of effect image display device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28 are both views of the effect image display device 115 as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 27, the effect image display device 115 has a first determination result display area 115a, a second determination result display area 115b, a common symbol display area 115c, and a hold display area 1150. Yes.

  The first determination result display area 115a corresponds to the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700, more specifically, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first special symbol display unit 84. This is the area where the results are displayed.

  The second determination result display area 115b corresponds to the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710, more specifically, the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the second special symbol display unit 86. This is the area where the results are displayed.

  The first determination result display area 115 a and the second determination result display area 115 b are arranged in the lower left area of the effect image display device 115. Each has a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of colors, and a lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 according to the display pattern displayed after performing a predetermined effect. The result is derived. However, the lottery result is not derived at the same time in the first determination result display area 115a and the second determination result display area 115b, and is derived based on the order in which the game balls are won at the respective start ports 390, 392, 394. .

  The common symbol display area 115c is an area for deriving one of the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. In the common symbol display area 115c, one symbol group composed of a plurality of (for example, three) symbol strings is displayed. After the variation effect of this one symbol group is performed, the combination of symbols that have stopped is displayed. The lottery result is derived. The variation effect time of one symbol group is the same as or substantially the same as the above-described variation time. Further, the common symbol display area 115c occupies at least two-thirds or more of all display areas in the effect image display device 115. The first determination result display area 115a, the second determination result display area 115b, and the hold display area 1150 are clearly partitioned. Thus, the player grasps the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 by a combination of one symbol group displayed in the common symbol display area 115c.

  The lottery results derived to the common symbol display area 115c are derived in the order in which the game balls win the respective start openings 390, 392, 394. That is, since the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 are not derived simultaneously, one symbol group includes the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 700. It functions as a common symbol for deriving a lottery result in the symbol lottery means 710. Thereby, even if the lottery is performed by both the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710, it becomes a very clear configuration as seen from the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. .

  Note that one symbol group displayed in the common symbol display area 115c differs between an effect of deriving a lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and an effect of deriving a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710. Production is performed in a manner.

  Specifically, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, any one of the variable effect patterns is selected and executed. . A variation effect is performed based on the selected variation effect pattern.

  When the selected variation effect pattern is a deviation variation that does not reach, the variation effect pattern is set according to the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation counter 703. For example, if the number of reserves in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 3 or more, the fluctuation time is relatively long and the fluctuation effect is performed. If the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 2 or less, An off-change effect is performed with a shorter change time than when the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 3 or more. Here, “displacement fluctuation” is a fluctuation in which the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out and the reach effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, the variation effect is performed based on a predetermined variation effect pattern. In the present embodiment, this specific variation effect pattern is a variation accompanied by a reach effect (hereinafter referred to as “reach variation”). However, when the so-called “short-time gaming state” in which the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720 is advantageous to the player is occurring, another variation effect different from the reach variation is performed.

  Thus, in the case where the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c and the case where the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, The degree of interest that the person is attracted to the common symbol display area 115c will be different. That is, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, a reach effect is performed. Therefore, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c and when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, Since the variation mode is different, a monotonous game can be avoided and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  The hold display area 1150 is arranged in the lower right area of the effect image display device 115, and includes a first hold display area 1151 and a second hold display area 1152. The first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152 are adjacent to each other.

  The first hold display area 1151 has four hold storage display sections, a first hold storage display section 1151a to a fourth hold storage display section 1151d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The second hold display area 1152 has four hold storage display sections, a fifth hold storage display section 1152a to an eighth hold storage display section 1152d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. That is, the sum of the hold storage display section of the first hold display area 1151 and the hold storage display section of the second hold display area 1152, the upper limit value (first predetermined number) of the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703, and the first The sum of the upper limit value (second predetermined number) of holding by the 2 special symbol holding counter 713 is the same number. More specifically, the number of the reserved storage display parts in the first hold display area 1151 is equal to the first predetermined number, and the number of the hold display parts in the second hold display area 1152 is equal to the second predetermined number. The number is the same.

  In addition, the first reserved storage display unit 1151a, the second reserved storage display unit 1151b, the third reserved storage display unit 1151c, the fourth reserved storage display unit 1151d, the fifth reserved storage display unit 1152a, the sixth The on-hold storage display unit 1152b, the seventh on-hold storage display unit 1152c, and the eighth on-hold storage display unit 1152d are regularly arranged in this order in the left-right direction, and the derivation to the common symbol display area 115c is as described above. Derived in the order listed. Thereby, the order derived | led-out to the common symbol display area 115c can be grasped | ascertained clearly.

  Each hold storage display unit 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 713, which is a first display mode indicating that the hold can be held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Is displayed in any one of the second display mode indicating that it is held and the third display mode indicating that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703.

  Each of the on-hold storage display portions 1152a to 1152d in the second on-hold display area 1152 can be displayed in any one of the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode. Information regarding the number of holds in the special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 may be hidden.

  Each display mode will be described. In FIG. 27, the display modes of the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c and the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d are the first display mode, the first hold storage display unit 1151a, and the third display mode. The display mode of the hold storage display unit 1151c, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a, and the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is the second display mode, and the second hold storage display unit 1151b and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d. Is the third display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the first display mode displays a frame (blue in the frame), which means that the first special symbol hold counter 703 can hold the frame. The second display mode means that a character is displayed and held by the second special symbol hold counter 713. The third display mode is displayed in red, which means that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Thus, the display mode is different between the display mode meaning that the first special symbol hold counter 703 holds and the display mode which means that the second special symbol hold counter 713 holds. .

  In FIG. 28, all of the first hold storage display unit 1151a to the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d are displayed in the first display mode. In addition, all of the fifth reserved storage display unit 1152a to the eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d are not displayed.

  Note that “non-display” means that none of the first display mode, the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. That is, the information regarding the number of holds of the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 is not displayed.

[Functional configuration of display device control board]
FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the display device control board 116 in the peripheral board 600. As shown in FIG. 29, the display device control board 116 includes first special symbol image display control means 614, second special symbol image display control means 615, effect image display control means 616, and merge hold display control means 620. And a merged reservation order storage means 626, a first special symbol reservation number storage means 628, a second special symbol reservation number storage means 630, and an effect reservation counter 631. The merge hold display control means 620 further includes a holdable information image display control means 6201, a first hold information image display control means 6202, a second hold information image display control means 6203, an identification code image display control means 6204, and a merge hold order. Image display control means 6205 is included. The display device control board 116 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 510 via the command receiving means 750 of the peripheral control board 610.

  The first special symbol image display control means 614 derives and displays the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 after performing a predetermined effect in the first determination result display area 115a.

  The second special symbol image display control means 615 derives and displays the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 after performing a predetermined effect in the second determination result display area 115b.

  The effect image display control means 616 specifies that the command receiving means 750 “has won the first start port 390” and “has won the second and third start ports 392, 394” from the main control board 510. One of the lottery results of the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived and displayed in the common symbol display area 115c.

  In the common symbol display area 115c, when a predetermined effect for deriving a lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 (that is, a variable display of symbols) is performed, the second special symbol lottery means 710 A predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result is not performed. Further, when the predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is performed, the predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is not performed.

  The merge hold order display control means 508 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the drawing order of the lottery results derived by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 derived in the common symbol display area 115c. The hold number information being held and the hold number information held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are displayed in a hold display area 1150 so that they can be recognized.

  The merge hold display control means 620 controls the hold related information related to the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 so that the hold display area 1150 can recognize the hold related information.

  Here, the “holding related information” is, for example, the holding number information indicating the number held by the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the second special symbol holding counter 713, the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the second Holdable information indicating that the special symbol hold counter 713 can hold, the lottery result based on the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (that is, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700) and the second special symbol A lottery result based on hold by the hold counter 713 (that is, a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710) corresponds to a hold derivation order indicating the order in which the lottery result is drawn to the common symbol display area 115c.

  Further, the holdable information image display control means 6201 has a first special symbol hold counter 703 and a second special symbol hold counter 713 for the holdable information which is one of the hold related information. Despite being able to hold up to an upper limit of a predetermined number (for example, 4) and a second predetermined number (for example, 4), only the holding by the first special symbol holding counter 703 can be held up to the first predetermined number. Is displayed in the hold display area 1150.

  The first hold information image display control means 6202 and the second hold information image display control means 6203 are each of the hold number information and the second special symbol applied to the first special symbol hold counter 703, which is one of the hold related information. Information on the number of holds for the hold counter 713 is displayed in the hold display area 1150.

  The identification code image display control means 6204 has the number-of-holds information and the second special symbol hold on the first special symbol hold counter 703 displayed by the first hold information image display control means 6202 and the second hold information image display control means 6203. A predetermined identification code is added to the hold number information for the counter 713 and displayed.

  The merge hold order image display control means 6205 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of hold by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are 1 or more. The derivation order is displayed in a recognizable manner.

  The merging hold order storage unit 626 stores the derivation order of the lottery results by the first special symbol lottery unit 700 or the second special symbol lottery unit 710 derived to the common symbol display area 115c. Specifically, information for specifying that the command receiving means 750 has won each of the start ports 390, 392, 394 is stored based on the order received from the main control board 510.

  The first special symbol hold number storage means 628 receives a command from the main control board 510 for the command receiving means 750 to specify that “the first start port 390 has been won” and is still drawn in the common symbol display area 115c. The number of results that are not derived and displayed is stored. This number corresponds to the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation counter 703.

  The second special symbol holding number storage means 630 receives a command from the main control board 510 for specifying that the command receiving means 750 has won “the second and third starting ports 392 and 394” and is still a common symbol. The number of lottery results not being derived and displayed is stored in the display area 115c. This number corresponds to the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713.

  The effect hold counter 631 will be described in detail later, but when the effect point P reaches 10 points, the special effect display is displayed until the change based on the hold that triggered the effect point reaches 10 points. This is a counter for holding.

[Production in the hold display area]
Next, specific effects performed in the hold display area 1150 of the effect image display device 115 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35. 30 to 35 are diagrams showing effects in the hold display area 1150.

  FIG. 30A shows the display of the hold display area 1150 when both the number of holds held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are zero. It is a figure which shows an aspect. At this time, the holdable information image display control means 6201 displays a recognizable upper limit value that can be held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Specifically, all of the first hold storage display unit 1151a to the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 are displayed in the first display mode. In the present embodiment, the number of the reserved storage display units displayed in the first display mode corresponds to the number of holds that can be held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. On the other hand, the fifth hold storage display portion 1152a to the eighth hold storage display portion 1152d of the second hold display area 1152 are all hidden (the two-dot chain line in the figure is hidden). Means the same).

  Note that the identification code image display control means 6204 attaches identification codes, for example, by numbers “1” to “8” to the first reserved memory display sections 1151a to 1152d, respectively. If it is displayed in any one of the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode, this identification code can be recognized (in the case of the second display mode in the figure). However, since the character display and the identification code are displayed alternately, they can be recognized). If it is not displayed, this identification code cannot be recognized.

  In FIG. 30 (b), when a game ball wins the first start opening 390 and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (specifically, the command receiving means 750 wins the "first start opening 390 wins"). When a command for specifying “what has been done” is received from the main control board 510), the first hold information display unit 1151a, which is the extreme position of the first display mode, displays the first hold information image display control means 6202. Thus, the display is controlled from the first display mode to the third display mode. Thereby, it can be recognized that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is “1”. When the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is N (N is a natural number greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to the first predetermined number), the position from the extreme end of the first display mode arranged in a line , N third display modes are displayed adjacent to each other.

  In FIG. 30 (c), when a game ball wins a prize at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 (specifically, the command receiving means 750 indicates that “the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 When a command for specifying “winning” is received from the main control board 510), the second hold storage display unit 1151b is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 6205. Display control. Thereby, it can be grasped that the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is one and the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is one.

  Further, when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a controls the display from the non-display to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. Is done. At this time, it can be felt from the player that the upper limit of holding is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

  The derivation order derived to the common symbol display area 115c is derived in the order of the first reserved storage display unit 1151a to the eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d. That is, the command receiving means 750 is led out to the common symbol display area 115c based on the winning order to the start ports 390, 392, 394 received from the main control board 510. Accordingly, in FIG. 30 (c), the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first reserved memory display unit 1151a and the second special symbol displayed on the second reserved memory display unit 1151b. It is derived in the order of the lottery results by the lottery means 710. Thus, the derivation order derived to the common symbol display area 115c can be grasped for the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710.

  In FIG. 30D, when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the first hold memory display unit 1151a. However, the second hold information image display control means 6203 performs display control from the third display mode to the second display mode. In addition, the second hold storage display unit 1151b is display-controlled from the second display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. The fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is displayed (maintained) in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. As described above, the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is zero and the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than the first predetermined number). The second display mode is N adjacent to the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the end position of the first display mode arranged in a line as shown in FIG. Is displayed. In addition, the first display mode is a number corresponding to the first predetermined number (for example, four), and the Nth second display mode from the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the extreme end position. The second hold storage display unit 1151b, which is adjacent to the first hold storage display unit 1151a, and the second display mode displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1151a are arranged and displayed in a line.

  In FIG. 30 (e), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the first hold memory display unit 1151a. However, the holdable information image display control means 6201 controls the display from the second display mode to the first display mode. Further, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is controlled to be hidden from the first display mode. Thereby, it is felt from the player that the holding upper limit is variable. Therefore, it becomes interested in when the upper limit of holding increases, and the interest is enhanced.

  FIG. 31A shows the sum of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 and the number of hold storage display sections in the first hold display area 1151 (four). It is a figure which shows the display mode of each holding | maintenance memory | storage display part 1151a-1152d in the case where is same. However, neither the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 nor the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is zero.

  FIG. 31A shows a third display mode in which the first hold storage display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d are displayed by the merged hold order image display control means 6205. It is displayed. The third hold storage display unit 1151c is displayed in the second display mode by the merge hold order image display control means 6205. Further, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. As a result, the number of holds held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 can be recognized. Derivation to the common symbol display area 115c is performed in the order of the first hold display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d. Therefore, the player can also grasp the derivation order to the common symbol display area 115c.

  In addition, since the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is displayed in the first display mode, the first special symbol hold counter 703 can grasp that the number of hold that can be held is one.

  In FIG. 31 (b), when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is changed from the first display mode to the first hold mode by the merged hold order image display control means 6205. Display control is performed in two display modes. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is controlled to be displayed from the non-display state to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201.

  In FIG. 31C, when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d is shifted to the display of the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the display of the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is shifted to the display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d. The The fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is display-controlled from the second display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. At this time, the player does not feel that the upper limit of the hold has changed as viewed from the player.

  In FIG. 31 (d), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1151a is started, as in FIG. 31 (c). The second display mode and the third display mode displayed on each hold storage display unit are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page.

  In FIG. 31 (e), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. , Respectively. Then, the sixth reserved storage display unit 1152b is hidden from the first display mode. Further, the fifth hold storage display portion 1152a is displayed (maintained) in the first display mode by the hold display area 1150. Thereby, the player feels that the upper limit value of the holding is variable.

  FIG. 32A shows a hold display area 1150 when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is four, which is the same as the first predetermined number, and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is zero. The display mode is shown. At this time, the hold storage display units 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 are controlled to be displayed in the third display mode by the first hold information image display control means 6202. Also, each of the on-hold storage display portions 1152a to 1152d in the second on-hold display area 1152 is not displayed.

  In FIG. 32 (b), when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is switched from non-display by the merged hold order image display control means 6205 to the second display. Display control is performed in the display mode. Thereby, from the viewpoint of the player, it feels as if it has been held beyond the holding upper limit, and the interest is enhanced.

  FIG. 33A shows that the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 reaches the second predetermined number, and all the hold display portions 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 The second hold information image display control means 6203 performs display control in the second display mode. In addition, all of the hold display portions 1152a to 1152d in the second hold display area 1152 are controlled to be displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. At this time, from the viewpoint of the player, it seems that the upper limit of holding is increased to 8 which is the sum of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number, and the interest is enhanced. As described above, when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is zero and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is N (N is 1 or more and the first predetermined number or less). Natural number), N second display modes and a number of first display modes corresponding to the first predetermined number are displayed. At this time, N second display modes are displayed adjacent to the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the extreme end position of the first display mode arranged in a row, and The number of first display modes corresponding to a predetermined number is a position adjacent to the Nth second display mode from the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the end position (for example, N = 4). (The position of the fifth reserved storage display portion 1152a) and the second display mode are arranged in a row. The identification code is the first reserved storage in which the identification code corresponding to 1 to the identification code corresponding to the sum of the first predetermined number and N (8 in FIG. 33A) is the end position. Displayed in order from the display unit 1151a.

  The state shown in FIG. 33A is likely to occur when, for example, the normal symbol lottery means 720 is a so-called “short-time gaming state” in which a lottery advantageous to the player is performed. This is because in the “short-time gaming state”, the pair of movable pieces 396 frequently opens and closes, so that it is easy to win a game ball at the third start port 394.

  At this time, when a game ball wins the second starting port 392, the command receiving means 750 receives a command specifying “having won the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394” from the peripheral board 600. However, a command for specifying the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is also received. That is, when the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is the second predetermined number (upper limit), even if a command for specifying the hold number in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is received, the second predetermined number Therefore, all the displays in the storage storage display units 1151a to 1152d in the first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152 are maintained by the holdable information image display control means 6201. (See FIG. 33B).

  In FIG. 33 (c), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode is shifted to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d is shifted to the display of the third hold storage display unit 1151c. Then, the display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d is display-controlled by the holdable information image display control unit 6201 from the second display mode to the first display mode. Further, the eighth reserved storage display portion 1152d is not displayed. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b and the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c are maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201.

  FIG. 34A shows a display mode of the hold display area 1150 when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 2 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is 3. The first hold storage display unit 1151a and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d are controlled to be displayed in the third display mode by the merged hold order image display control unit 6205. The second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a are controlled to be displayed in the second display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 6205. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b and the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c are controlled to be displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201.

  In FIG. 34 (b), when a game ball wins the first starting port 390, the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is changed from the first display mode to the third display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 6205. Display controlled. Thereby, it can be confirmed that the player feels that the holding upper limit has been increased first, but it is not a mere production that seems to have increased, although the holding upper limit has not actually increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to feel the feeling that the holding upper limit has actually increased.

  In FIG. 34 (c), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The fourth hold memory display unit 1151d is displayed on the third hold memory display unit 1151c, the fifth hold memory display unit 1152a is displayed on the fourth hold memory display unit 1151d, the sixth The display on hold storage display section 1152b is shifted to the display on fifth hold storage display section 1152a. Then, the display of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is display-controlled from the third display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. The seventh hold storage display unit 1152c is maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201.

  In FIG. 34 (d), when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is changed from the first display mode by the merge hold order image display control means 6205. Display control is performed in the second display mode. In addition, the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d is controlled to be switched from non-display to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. The display modes of the first hold storage display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d, and the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a are as follows. Maintained. Thereby, from the viewpoint of the player, it can be felt that the upper limit of holding has increased, and the interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, as the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the hold storage display units 1152a to 1152d in the second hold display area 1152 change from the non-display to the first display mode. Alternatively, display control is performed in the second display mode. In this way, interest is enhanced by the player feeling that the upper limit of the holding is increased.

  In FIG. 34 (e), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The fourth hold memory display unit 1151d is displayed on the third hold memory display unit 1151c, the fifth hold memory display unit 1152a is displayed on the fourth hold memory display unit 1151d, the sixth The display on hold storage display section 1152b is shifted to the display on fifth hold storage display section 1152a. Then, the display of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is controlled from the second display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. The seventh hold storage display unit 1152c is maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. The eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d is not displayed.

  FIG. 35A shows the display mode of the hold display area 1150 when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 1 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is 4. The first hold storage display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d are displayed on the second display by the merged hold order image display control unit 6205. The display is controlled in the form. The fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is controlled to be displayed in the third display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b, the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c, and the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d are displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201.

  At this time, if a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the command receiving means 750 will specify a command that “has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394”. Is received from the peripheral board 600, but a command for specifying the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is also received. That is, when the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is the second predetermined number (upper limit), even if a command for specifying the hold number in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is received, the second predetermined number Therefore, all the displays in the storage storage display sections 1151a to 1152d in the first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152 are maintained by the merge hold order image display control means 6205. (See FIG. 35B).

  In FIG. 35 (c), when a game ball wins the first starting port 390, the command receiving means 750 receives a command specifying “having won the first starting port 390” from the peripheral board 600. Along with this, a command for specifying the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is also received. Before the game ball wins the first starting port 390 (see FIG. 35B), the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 1, so the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is The display is controlled from the first display mode to the third display mode by the merge pending order image display control means 6205.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main board 500 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by the CPU 511 (both see FIG. 23) mounted on the main control board 510 of the main board 500.

  As shown in FIG. 36, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 511 (see FIG. 23) first executes a power-on process (step S10). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 513 (see FIG. 23) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). If normal, the data is stored in the RAM 513. A process for returning to the state at the time of the power failure occurrence (recovery process) is executed according to the backup data being stored. Initial settings and interrupt timing settings). If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM 513 as backup data. If the RAM erase switch for instructing the erase of the backup data stored in the RAM 513 is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM 513 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. If backup data is not stored in the RAM 513 mounted on the main control board 510 during the power-on process, the RAM 513 is cleared and normal initial setting is performed. In the power-on process, a power-on command indicating that the main control board 510 (see FIG. 23) is activated can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 610 (see FIG. 24) when normal initial setting is executed. The process of setting to is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 610 that the main control board 510 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 513, and when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again, the power supply Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 511 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is being supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 510 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 510 in step S20, processing at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S40).

  When the power cut occurs, the operation of the gaming machine is performed before the power failure when the power supply voltage supplied to the power board after the power failure is restored (24V in this embodiment) (hereinafter referred to as “power recovery”). In order to start from the state, the state at the time of power failure occurrence is stored in the RAM 513 as backup data. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power failure occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but as a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 511 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, the checksum of the RAM 513 is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 513 before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 511 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 511 prohibits access to the RAM 513 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for stopping power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that the process described above cannot return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the CPU 511 of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, even when the power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop of FIG. 37 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 511 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 510 of the main board 500 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 511 executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, the various sensors described above (gate sensor 560, first start port sensor 580, second start port sensor 582, third start port sensor 584, effect opening / closing device count sensor 570, jackpot game) A process for monitoring the detection signal of the switchgear count sensor 576 and the like is executed.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 520 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 560 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing the opening / closing control of the movable piece 396 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processing from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the start of the winning game is executed, and the presentation big prize opening 3981 and the big prize gaming big prize opening 4001 (whichever The processing for performing the opening / closing control of FIG.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 510 to the peripheral control board 610 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 610 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 510 in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, when it is determined to start the jackpot game, the random number for determining whether or not to start the jackpot game, whether to start the jackpot game, Design random number used to determine whether or not to make a promising jackpot, to determine whether or not to reach reach when it is determined not to start a probabilistic jackpot game, non-probabilistic jackpot game and small hit game in jackpot judgment The reach determination random number used, the fluctuation pattern random number used to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86, and the pair of movable pieces 396 are opened. There is a random number for normal symbol determination used for determining whether to control the state (normal symbol determination).

  The variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is controlled to be displayed by the effect image display device 115 may be determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, whether or not to determine the success / failure determination random number, the design random number, and the pair of movable pieces 396 related to the start of the big hit game or the small hit game are set to an open state in which the game ball can be easily received. The random number for judgment per ordinary symbol related to whether or not is updated. That is, the random numbers used for the start of the jackpot game and the determination regarding whether or not the pair of movable pieces 396 are controlled to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing so, the probability (probability to determine that the hit game is started, probability to determine that the pair of movable pieces 396 are controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number can be made constant, and the game It is possible to prevent a person from becoming disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are updated regardless of the occurrence of the winning gaming state and the display result of the normal symbol. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 510 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update processing, when the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not the circuit has made one round, the determination is made to start counting next. The initial value determination random number and the like for determining the initial value of the random number are also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for obtaining the random number for determination of success / failure, two means, a random number extraction means for determination per first special symbol 702 and a random number extraction means for determination per second special symbol 712, are provided. It is good also as a structure which provides this.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, first, second, and third start-up prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 390, the second start port 392, and the third start port 394, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first, second, and third start-up winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first, second, and third start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (in step S120). YES) The fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described later in detail, it is determined whether or not to start the big hit game or the small hit game, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and the decorative symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115 is determined, and the variation pattern is determined. Is set to the timer, which is set in accordance with the change time (the time from when the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 starts the special symbol change display until the stop display). The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is made in the variation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”. If neither the big win nor the small win is determined, the process selection flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the jackpot type (long hit or short hit) is determined, and the opening / closing operation of the stage jackpot 3981 and / or jackpot game jackpot 4001 is controlled according to the jackpot type. The number of rounds, the opening time and the number of game balls to be awarded are set, and the processing flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a small hit game process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game process, the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the large winning opening for effect 3981 are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In this special electric utility jackpot control process, a stage winning prize port 3981 and a jackpot gaming prize box 4001 based on the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the opening time, and the number of game balls to be awarded. When the jackpot game is finished, it is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function and the time reduction function, and the process flag is updated to “0”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the special electric accessory small hit control process (step S250) is executed. In this special electric accessory small hitting control process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 3981 for production is controlled based on the number of opening times, the opening time and the limited number set in the small hitting game process (step S220). When the small hit game ends, processing for updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[Random number storage means for special symbols]
Next, based on FIG. 40, the storage system by the hold order storage means 740 (refer FIG. 25) is demonstrated. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage area related to the hold order. A RAM 513 (see FIG. 23) provided in the CPU 511 of the main control board 510 has a special symbol random number storage area 5131 and a processing area 5132. Various data (random determination number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 580, and the second start port sensor 582 or the third start port sensor 584 The various data acquired based on the detection in the above (the random number for success / failure determination, the design random number, and the special design type) are stored in the special design random number storage area 5131 by the holding order storage means 740 in the order in which the game balls are detected. Remembered. The special symbol random number storage area 5131 is divided into eight storage areas from the first storage area 5131a to the eighth storage area 5131h. The first storage area 5131a, the second storage area 5131b, the third storage area 5131c, The fourth storage area 5131d, the fifth storage area 5131e, the sixth storage area 5131f, the seventh storage area 5131g, and the eighth storage area 5131h are stored in this order.

  Each of the eight storage areas from the first storage area 5131a to the eighth storage area 5131h and the processing area 5132 has three storages: a random number storage area for determination of success / failure, a random number storage area for probability variation determination, and a special symbol type storage area. Has an area. The determination random number storage area is an area for storing a determination random number used for determining whether to start a big hit game or a small hit game. In addition, the random number storage area for probability variation determination stores a symbol random number used for determining whether or not the stop symbol pattern of the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is a probability variation symbol in the case of a big hit. It is an area to do. In the special symbol type storage area, whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure and the symbol random number are data acquired by detecting the game ball in the first start port sensor 580, the second start port sensor 582, or the third This is an area for storing whether it is data acquired by detecting a game ball in the start port sensor 584. In the present embodiment, when the success / failure determination random number and the design random number are extracted by the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 580, the first special symbol type is set as the second start port sensor 582 or the second start number sensor 580. If it is extracted by detection of a game ball by the 3 start sensor 584, the second special symbol type is stored.

  When a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 580, the first special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 702 extracts the winning / failure determination random number and the design random number. The extracted success / failure random numbers and design random numbers are stored in the success / failure determination random number storage area and the probability variation determination random number storage area by the hold order storage unit 740, respectively. Further, the first special symbol type is stored in the special symbol type storage area.

  When a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 582 or the third start port sensor 584, a random number for determination per second special symbol is extracted in the same manner as when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 580. The means 712 extracts a random number for determination of success / failure and a design random number. The extracted success / failure determination random numbers and symbol random numbers are stored in the determination / non-permission determination random number storage area and the probability variation determination random number storage area, respectively. Further, the second special symbol type is stored in the special symbol type storage area.

  The processing area 5132 is an area that is read when the determination results of various data are derived to the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. In the present embodiment, reading of various data stored in each of the areas 5131a to 5131h of the special symbol random number storage area 5131 is restricted, and various data stored in the processing area 5132 is determined, and the determination result Is derived to the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86.

  Note that the processing region 5132 is not necessarily provided. For example, reading of various data stored in each of the storage areas 5131a to 5131h of the special symbol random number storage area 5131 is normally restricted, and is stored in the first storage area 5131a only when the change of the special symbol is started. Only various data may be read.

  In addition, when the change of the special symbol is started, a shift process of various data stored in each storage area is performed. Details of this shift processing will be described later.

[First, second and third start-up winning prizes]
Next, the first, second, and third start opening prize winning processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third start-up winning process.

  In the first, second, and third start opening winning process, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 392 or the third start opening 394 (step S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from second start port sensor 582 or third start port sensor 584. At this time, if a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 582, it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 392, and if a detection signal is output from the third start port sensor 584, It is determined that a game ball has won the third start port 394. If no detection signal is output from either the second start port sensor 582 or the third start port sensor 584, no game ball has won a prize in either the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 (step (NO in S1101).

  When it is determined in step S1101 that the game ball has won the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, various data (randomness number for determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) are acquired and provided in the RAM 513. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102). Note that the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means 712 for determination per second special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the CPU 511 performs a second hold storage process (step S1103). In the second hold storage process, various data (random determination number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is stored as a special symbol random number. This is a process of storing 1 in the area 5131 and adding 1 to the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713. More specifically, in the special symbol random number storage area 5131, the random number storage region for determination of success / failure, the random number storage region for probability variation determination, the random number region for random determination, the special symbol type storage region, the special symbol type storage region, Remember each one.

  Various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131 in the second reserved storage process of step S1103 is the area where n is the smallest among the free areas of the first storage area 5131a to the nth storage area (n is an integer). After that, the process proceeds to step S1104. For example, if the first storage area 5131a is a free area, it is stored in the first storage area 5131a. If the first storage area 5131a is not a free area and the second storage area 5131b is a free area, it is stored in the second storage area 5131b. If the first storage area 5131a and the second storage area 5131b are not empty areas and the third storage area 5131c is an empty area, the CPU 511 stores various data in the third storage area 5131c, and the process proceeds to step S1104.

  When the CPU 511 determines in step S1101 that a game ball has not won any of the second start port 392 and the third start port 394 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the second special symbol hold counter When it is determined that the counter value 713 has reached the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the CPU 511 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 390 (step S1104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 580, and when a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 580, a game ball wins the first start port 390. (YES in step S1104). If a detection signal is not output from the first start port sensor 580, it is determined that a game ball has not won the first start port 390 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that a game ball has won at the first starting port 390, various random numbers (randomness number for determination, design random number, special symbol type) are acquired, and a first special symbol hold counter provided in the RAM 513 is obtained. It is determined whether the counter value of 703 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105). Note that the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means 702 for determination per first special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the CPU 511 performs a first hold storage process (step S1106). In the first hold storage process, various data (random determination randomness, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the first start port 390 are stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131. In this process, 1 is added to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703. More specifically, in the special symbol random number storage area 5131, the random number storage region for determination of success / failure, the random number storage region for probability variation determination, the random number region for random determination, the special symbol type storage region, the special symbol type storage region, Remember each one.

  Various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131 in the first reserved storage process of step S1106 is the area where n is the smallest among the free areas of the first storage area 5131a to the nth storage area (n is an integer). After that, the process proceeds to step S1104. For example, if the first storage area 5131a is a free area, it is stored in the first storage area 5131a. If the first storage area 5131a is not a free area and the second storage area 5131b is a free area, it is stored in the second storage area 5131b. If the first storage area 5131a and the second storage area 5131b are not empty areas and the third storage area 5131c is an empty area, the CPU 511 stores various data in the third storage area 5131c, and ends the processing.

  When the CPU 511 determines in step S1104 that the game ball has not won the first starting port 390 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is an upper limit of 4. When it is determined that it has reached (NO in step S1105), the process ends.

  The counter value stored in the first special symbol hold counter 703 or the second special symbol hold counter 713 is the number of various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131 acquired in step S1104 or step S1101 (that is, , 8 of the storage areas 5131a to 5131h, the number of storage areas in which various data are stored).

  Further, in step S1102 and step S1105, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 713 is the upper limit value, and the first start If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is the upper limit when a game ball is won in the mouth 390, the various data acquired in step S1101 or step S1104 are discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, it is not always necessary to acquire various data (random number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) in step S1101. However, it may be performed between step S1101 to step S1103. For example, various data may be acquired after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 713 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102 without acquiring various data in step S1101, or in step S1103. You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has won at the first starting port 390, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1104, and steps S1104 to S1104 are performed. What is necessary is just to perform between step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1106 You may make it acquire by a 1st pending | holding memory | storage process.

  As described above, in the first, second, and third start opening prize processing, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 392 or the third start opening 394, and the second special opening is determined. If the count value by the symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit, storage processing of various data acquired by winning the game ball in the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is performed. After that, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won at the first start opening 390, and if the count value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit, the game ball has won at the first start opening 390. Thus, the storage processing of the various data acquired is performed, and the series of processing ends. Accordingly, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously (within the same 4 ms interrupt process). Is a special symbol in which various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is ahead of various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 390. Stored in the random number storage area 5131. That is, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously, the second special symbol success / failure determination means. The jackpot determination by 714 is performed before the jackpot determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704. As a result, the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704. First, it is displayed on the second special symbol display 86 and the common symbol display area 115c. In particular, during the short-time game, since the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720 is a lottery advantageous to the player, the pair of movable pieces 396 are frequently opened and closed, and the game ball wins the third starting port 394. It becomes easy. However, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously, the second special symbol success / failure determining means 714 By performing the jackpot determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 prior to the jackpot determination by the first special symbol winning / decision means 704, the game ball is won regardless of whether the game ball is won at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. It is possible to avoid as much as possible the various data that have been discarded, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 511 executes a series of processes in steps S1104 to 1106 after executing a series of processes in steps S1101 to S1103. Instead, the CPU 511 executes steps S1104 to S1106. After executing the series of processes, the series of processes in steps S1101 to S1103 may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131 (that is, the sum of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713). Is referred to as “starting memory number”.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the start memory number is 0 (step S1301). If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), the special symbol random number storage area 5131 is shifted (step S1302). In this shift process, various data stored in the first storage area 5131a are stored in the processing area 5132, and various data stored in the nth storage area (2 ≦ n ≦ 8) are n-1) A process of storing in a storage area (2 ≦ n ≦ 8). When various data is stored only in the first storage area 5131a (when the second storage area 5131b to the eighth storage area 5131h are empty areas), the various data stored in the first storage area 5131a. Is stored in the processing area 5132 only. If the start memory is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the process is terminated.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 511 determines whether or not the type stored in the special symbol type storage area of the processing area 5132 is the second special symbol type (step S1303). At this time, if it is the second special symbol type (YES in step S1303), the second special symbol flag is turned ON (step S1303) and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is decremented by 1 ( Step S1305) and the process proceeds to Step S1308. If the type stored in the special symbol type storage area of the processing region 5132 determined in step S1303 is the first special symbol type (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1303). Along with S1306, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is decremented by 1 (step S1307), and the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, the CPU 511 determines whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 734 (step S1308). If the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S1308), the special symbol probability change time determination table 708 is selected (step S1309), and if the probability variation function is not activated (NO in step S1308), special The symbol normal hour determination table 706 is selected (step S1310). Then, the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1311).

  The jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the first special symbol determination unit 704 if the first special symbol flag is ON, and the second special symbol determination unit if the second special symbol flag is ON. 714.

  If the CPU 511 determines that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit in step S1311 (YES in step S1311), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step S1311), and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is long (step S1313). ). Specifically, it is determined by referring to the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the random number for determination of success or failure whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is long hit. If it is determined that the length is per unit (YES in step S1313), the per unit length flag is turned on (step S1314), then the processing flag is updated to “1” (step S1318), and the processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S1313 that there is no long hit (NO in step S1313), the short hit flag is turned on (step S1315), and then the processing flag is updated to “1” (step S1318). finish. If it is determined that the big hit determination in step S1311 is not a big hit (NO in step S1311), the small hit determination is performed based on Table 1 (step S1316). If it is determined that the small hit is determined in the small hit determination (YES in step S1316), the small hit flag is turned on (step S1317), the process proceeds to step S1318, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the process is terminated. . If it is determined that the small hit is not a small hit (NO in step S1316), the process proceeds to step S1318, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, after the special symbol random number storage area 5131 is shifted in step S1302, the judgment table selected in step S1310 (special symbol normal hour judgment table 706 or special symbol probability variation per hour judgment). The jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table 708) and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1311), but is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table (special symbol normal time determination table 706 or special symbol probability variation time determination table 708) and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the first storage area 5131a, Thereafter, the special symbol random number storage area 5131 may be shifted. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the first storage area 5131a can be referred to only when the change starts.

  Details of the jackpot determination and the small hit determination are as described above with reference to Table 1 and Table 2.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process (step S150). FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the hour variation pattern table setting process per first special symbol length. FIG. 45 is a table showing variation patterns selected in the first special symbol length per hour pattern table setting process. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 47 is a list chart showing the variation patterns selected in the second special symbol length hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 50 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process and the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 52 is a flowchart continued from A of FIG. FIG. 53 is a list chart showing a variation pattern selected when reach is determined in the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 55 is a flowchart continued from C in FIG. FIG. 56 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected when reach is determined in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 57 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected when reach is not determined in the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process and the second special symbol out-of-variation variation pattern table setting process.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 45, 47, 50, 53, 56, and 57, commands, lottery results, variation times, variation names (variation contents), and variation numbers are associated with the variation numbers. The probability that the variation content of is selected is stored. The “variation content” is the content of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 115 and the sound effect or music output from the speakers 18 and 57 in correspondence with the effect content.

  In the variation pattern setting process of FIG. 43, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1510). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is derived based on the variation of the special symbol this time. If it is determined that the big hit flag is ON (YES in step S1510), it is next determined whether or not the long hit flag is ON (step S1520). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determined in step S1510 is a long hit. If it is determined that the long winning flag is ON (YES in step S1520), it is then determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1530). That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation is based on a winning / decision random number extracted based on the detection of the game ball by the first start sensor 580. If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1530), a first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1540) is performed. In the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1540), it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is being operated (that is, whether or not the time reduction game is being executed by the time reduction game execution means 736), and the probability variation function. Depending on whether it is in operation (that is, whether or not a probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 734) and whether or not it is a length per probability variation symbol, the first special symbol length per Select the time variation pattern table.

  If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is not ON (NO in step S1530), the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1550) is performed. In the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1550), whether or not the time reduction function is operating, whether or not the probability variation function is operating, and whether or not the probability variation per length Depending on whether or not, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol length is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1520 that the long hit flag is not ON (ie, short hit) (NO in step S1520), short hit variation pattern table setting processing (step S1560) is performed. In the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, it is determined whether or not the short time function is operating and whether the probability variation function is in operation, and the short hit time variation pattern table is selected according to each gaming state. To do.

  If it is determined in step S1520 that there is no long hit (that is, a short hit), it is not determined whether or not the current variation is based on the detection of the game ball by the first start sensor 580. Accordingly, when a short win occurs in response to the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 390, and in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the short hit is generated. In any case, the same variation pattern table is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1510 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1510), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1570). If it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S1570), a small hit hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1580) is performed. In the small hit hour variation pattern setting process, it is determined whether or not the short time function is in operation and whether the probability variation function is in operation, and a variation pattern table at the small hit time corresponding to each gaming state is selected. .

  Note that if it is determined in step S1570 that it is a small hit, it is based on the fact that the current change is detected by the first start sensor 580 in the same manner as in the case where it is determined in step S1520 that it is not a long hit. It is not judged whether or not. Accordingly, when a small hit is generated in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 390, and in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the small hit is made. In any case, the same variation pattern table is selected.

  If it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1570), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1590). If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1590), the first special symbol outlier variation pattern table setting process (step S1600) is performed. In the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is activated and whether or not the probability variation function is activated, and then whether or not reach variation is performed is determined by lottery ( Hereinafter, this lottery is referred to as “reach lottery”. In the reach lottery, a reach determination random number is acquired, the acquired reach determination random number is stored in the RAM 513, and the determination value set in a predetermined reach determination table matches the acquired reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not reach variation is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the short time function is activated, whether or not the probability variation function is activated, whether or not reach variation is performed, and the counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (see FIG. 25). Based on this, the variation pattern table at the time of the first special symbol deviation is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1590 that the first special symbol flag is not ON (NO in step S1590), the second special symbol out-of-shift pattern table setting process (step S1610) is performed. In the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, it is determined whether or not the time-shortening function is operating and whether or not the probability variation function is operating. When the time reduction function is not activated, the reach variation pattern table in which the reach variation is always performed is selected. If the operation is short-time operation, the reach determination random number is acquired and stored in the RAM 513, and the acquired reach determination random number is matched with a determination value set in a predetermined reach determination table. Then, it is determined whether or not reach fluctuation is to be made. Then, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is activated, whether or not the probability variation function is activated, whether or not reach variation is performed, the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (see FIG. 25), Accordingly, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol deviation is selected.

  When each variation pattern table is set, the process advances to step S1620 to determine the variation pattern. In determining the variation pattern, first, a variation display random number is acquired. Based on the obtained variation display random number, any one of the variation patterns set in the variation pattern table set in step S1540, step S1550, step S1560, step S1580, step S1600 or step S1610 is selected. A variation pattern is determined (step S1620).

  Each variation pattern is set with a variation time and a command. When the variation pattern is determined (step S1620), the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1630). Then, a command corresponding to the variation pattern set as the selection value is set as an effect command transmitted to the peripheral control board 610. When the variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1630), the variation time corresponding to the set variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1640). That is, the variation time of the special symbol is set in a timer provided in the RAM 513 mounted on the main control board 510. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1650), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. In the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 44, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the time-saving function is inactive, that is, whether or not the time-saving game is being executed by the time-saving game execution means 736. Is determined (step S 15401). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S 15401), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of symbol per long when the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S 15402). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Table 1 is selected, and if the symbol is a normal length, table 2 is selected (see FIG. 45).

  If it is determined in step S 15401 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S 15401), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 734. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S15403). If it is determined that the probability variation function has not been activated (YES in step S15403), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the short-time function is activated and when the probability is low is selected (step S15404). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Select table 3 and select table 4 if the symbol per normal length.

  If it is determined in step S15403 that the probability variation function is not inoperative, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S15403), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the time-short function is activated and at high probability is selected. (Step S15405). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 5 and select the table 6 when the symbol per normal length.

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S15402, step S15404, and step S15405, the first special symbol length per variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When table 1 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the variation number 13 per normal length of variation number 10 is obtained. Per song reach A normal length, per song reach A long length of variation number 15, per song reach B length of variation number 17 (via song reach A), per length of song reach C (via song reach A) of variation number 19, Variation per song reach D length (variation number 21) per song reach D, per song reach B first half length, variation number 28 per song reach B second length, variation number 33 per song reach C first half length Per song reach C second half length of number 35, per first half length of song reach D of variation number 40, per second half length of song reach D of variation number 42, and variation number 4 Of the chances (per probable length of change), change one of the fluctuation patterns to 500/4000, 3500/6000, 5000/4000, 8000/4000, 10,000 / 4000, and 10,000 / 4000, respectively. , 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/64000, and 3000/6000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the normal pattern is selected with a probability of 500/60004 as the variation pattern, the command 0AH corresponding to the variation pattern per normal length is set as the effect command, and 21500 ms is set as the variation time value in the timer. When this normal length hit is selected, the reach variation is executed after the start of variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10), and then the stop symbol is long without executing the super reach effect. Display to be a hit mode. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is used as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 2 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as table 1 is selected with the same probability. However, the probability that the variation numbers 26, 28, 33, 35, 40, and 42 are selected is 4000/64000 in the table 1 and 4500/64000 in the table 2. The probability that the variation number 45 is selected is 3000/64000 in the table 1, but not selected in the table 2. Then, similarly to the case where the table 1 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 3 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on this acquired variation pattern random number, variation per song reach B first half length of variation number 26 Number 28 per song reach B second half length, number 33 first song reach C per first half length, number 35 song reach C per second half length, number 40 song reach D first half length, and number 42 song reach One of the fluctuation patterns per second half of reach D has a probability of 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 11000/64000, and 11000/64000, respectively. Select with. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B first half length is selected with a probability of 10500 of 64000 as the variation pattern, the command 1AH corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B first half length is set as an effect command and the variation time value is 41100 ms. Is set to the timer. When this song reach B first half per length is selected, the variation of reach is executed after the start of variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10), and the character is staged along with the performance of the song (B). The super-reaching effect of the aspect sung above is performed, and then the stop symbol is displayed so as to be a long-hit aspect.

  When the table 4 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as the table 3 is selected with the same probability. As in the case where the table 3 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 5 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, per song tune B completion of variation number 51 (common) , Variation number 52 per song revive B door revival length, variation number 53 singing reach B door revival length per 2 revival length, variation number 54 singing reach B door third revival length, variation number 60 Per song reach C completion (probable change), per song revive length of the first song reach C door of variation number 61, per second revival length of song reach C door of variation number 62, and song reach C door 3 of variation number 63 Per revive length of song, per reach of song reach D with variation number 69 (probability variation), per revival length of song reach D door with variation number 70, per revival length of song reach D door with variation number 71, and , One of the fluctuation patterns among the third revival length of the song reach D door of the movement number 72 is 30000/60000, 500/4000/000, 500/64000, 1000/64000, and 10,000 / 4000, respectively. , 250/4000/250, 6/4000, 5500/4000, 10,000 / 4000, 250/4000, 250/4000, and 5500/6000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when song reach B per run length with a probability of 30000/60000 is selected as a variation pattern, command 33H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B finish length is set as a production command and a variation time value is 55000 ms. To the timer. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 6 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern per song reach B completion of the variation number 51 is always selected without obtaining the variation pattern random number. Then, the command 33H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as an effect command, and 55000 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer. For the completion of the song reach B, the super reach in the form in which the character is singing on the stage with the song (B) is displayed after the decorative pattern displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts to change. Then, although the stage door closes, the performance in which the performance and the character display are not interrupted is repeated three times, and after the song (B) has been played, the stop symbol is displayed in a long-hit manner.

  Thus, the content of the variation pattern when the table 6 is selected is different from the content of the variation pattern when the table 5 is selected. That is, per song reach B door revival length, per song revival door B revival length, song reach B door third revival length, and song reach C completion Per song revival length, singing reach C door second revival length, singing reach C door third revival length, singing reach D door revival length, per song reach D completion, per revival length Since neither the song reach D door second revival length nor the song reach D door third revival length is selected on the table 6, these variation patterns are displayed in the effect image display device 115. When it is displayed, the per unit length of probability change is fixed.

  Next, the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. In the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 46, first, the CPU 511 determines whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game execution means 736 is executing the time-shortening game. Is determined (step S15501). If it is determined that the time-shortening function is not activated (YES in step S15501), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of symbol per long when the time-shortening function is not activated is selected (step S15502). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short length with probability change or a symbol per regular length. If the table 7 is selected and the symbol per normal length is selected, the table 8 is selected (see FIG. 47).

  If it is determined in step S15501 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S15501), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 734. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S15503). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15503), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the short-time function is activated and when the probability is low is selected (step S15504). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short length with probability change or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 9 and select the table 10 when the symbol per normal length.

  If it is determined in step S15503 that the probability variation function is not inactive, that is, the probability variation gaming state is selected (NO in step S15503), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per length at the time of the short-time function activation and at the high probability is selected. (Step S15505). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short length with probability change or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 11 and select the table 12 if the symbol is a pattern per normal length.

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S15502, step S15504, and step S15505, the second special symbol length per variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the table 7 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the variation number 75 per normal length of the variation number 78 is obtained. Per song reach A normal length, per song reach A long length of variable number 80, per length of song reach B of variable number 82 (via song reach A), per length of song reach C (via song reach A) of variable number 84, One of the variation patterns among the length of song reach D (via song reach A) of variation number 86 is 900/64000, 3800/64000, 6000/64000, 12000/64000, 64000, respectively. Select with a probability of 20000 / minute and 21300/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the normal pattern is selected with a probability of 900/60004 as the variation pattern, the command 51H corresponding to the variation pattern per normal length is set as the effect command, and the variation time value is set to 15400 ms in the timer. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 8 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as the table 7 is selected with the same probability. However, the probability that the variation number 82 is selected is 12000/14000 in the table 7, but 15000/64000 in the table 8. In addition, the probability that the variation number 86 is selected is 21300/64000 in the table 7, but 18300/64000 in the table 8. As in the case where the table 7 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 9 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, per song completion B completion of the variation number 51 (common) , Variation number 52 per song revive B door first revival length, variation number 53 singing reach B door second revival length, variation number 54 singing reach B door third revival length, variation number 60 Per song reach C completion (probable change), song reach C door with change number 61, first resurrection length, song reach C door with variable number 62, second resurrection length, song reach C door with change number 63 third Per revive length, per revival of 69 song reach D with change number 69 (probable change), per revival length of song reach D door with change number 70, per revival length of song reach D door with change number 71, and per change number Of the two song reach D doors per 3rd revival length, one of the fluctuation patterns is 26500/64000, 500/44000, 500/44000, 1000/64000, 15000/64000, 64000, respectively. Select with a probability of 250/500, 6/4000/2000, 6/4000/4000, 15000/64000, 250/64000, 500/64000, and 2000/6000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, per song reach B completion length is selected with a probability of 26500/64000, command 33H corresponding to the selected variation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as a production command, and 55000 ms is set as a timer for the variation time value. Set to. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 11 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, variation per song reach B first half length of variation number 26 Number 28 per song reach B second half length, number 33 first song reach C per first half length, number 35 song reach C per second half length, number 40 song reach D first half length, and number 42 song reach One of the fluctuation patterns per second half of reach D has a probability of 13750/64000, 13750/64000, 10,000 / 64000, 10,000 / 64000, 8250/64000, and 8250/64000, respectively. Select with. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when per song reach B length is selected with a probability of 13750/64000 as a variation pattern, command 1AH corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B length is set as a production command and 41100 ms as a variation time value is timer Set to.

  When the table 10 is selected in the second special symbol length hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern per song reach B completion length of the variation number 51 is always selected without obtaining the variation pattern random number. Then, the command 33H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as an effect command, and 55000 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer.

  Thus, the content of the variation pattern when the table 10 is selected is different from the content of the variation pattern when the table 9 is selected. In other words, per song reach B door revival length, song reach B door revival length, song reach B door revival length 3 revival length per song reach C may be selected at table 9 Per song revival length, singing reach C door 2 revival length, singing reach C door 3 revival length, singing reach D door 3 revival length, singing reach D completion per 1 revival length Since neither the song reach D door second revival length nor the song reach D door third revival length is selected on the table 10, these variation patterns are displayed in the effect image display device 115. When it is displayed, the per unit length of probability change is fixed.

  Next, the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50. FIG. In the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 48, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 736 ( Step S15601). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S15601), a variation pattern table in the case where the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S15602). That is, when the time-short game is not executed by the time-short game execution means 736, the table 13 is selected regardless of whether or not the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 734 (see FIG. 50).

  If it is determined in step S15601 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S15601), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 734. It is determined whether or not the state is not performed (step S15603). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15603), a variation pattern table is selected when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation function is not activated (step S15604). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 736 and the probability change game is not executed by the probability change game execution means 734, the table 14 is selected (see FIG. 50).

  If it is determined in step S15601 that the time reduction function is not inactive (NO in step S15603), a variation pattern table at the time of the time reduction function activation and the probability variation function activation is selected (step S15605). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 736 and the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 734, the table 15 is selected (see FIG. 50).

  When the table 13 is selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern with the chance of variation number 43 is selected with a probability of 100% (that is, always). Then, the command 2BH is set as an effect command, and 24600 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer. At the chance (short win), after the decorative design is variably displayed on the effect image display device 115, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a short win different from the long win without the reach effect. As described above, in the normal game state in which the time-shortening function is not activated and the probability changing function is not activated, only one type of short win display mode for the chance is stored in the display mode storage unit 770.

  When the table 14 is selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the song reach B intro of the variation number 23 and the song reach of the variation number 30 are obtained. Any variation pattern is selected with a probability of 24000/64000, 20000/64000, and 20000/64000, respectively, out of C intro and out of song reach D intro with variation number 37. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when song reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 24000/64000, command 17H corresponding to the variation pattern of song reach B intro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value in a timer. . If this song reach B intro is selected, the decorative image is displayed on the effect image display device 115 variably, and then the intro of the song (B) is played with the reach effect. The stop display is performed in a short hit manner different from the hit. Similarly, the variation pattern of the song reach C intro and the song reach D intro is also selected with a probability of 20000/60000, and the commands 1EH and 25H of the selected variation pattern are set as production commands, and the variation time value Set 24100 ms in the timer.

  When the table 15 is selected in the short hit variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the first song reach B door short number of variation number 47, variation number 48 song reach B door per 3rd short, variable number 56 song reach C per 1 door short, variable number 57 song reach C door 3rd per short, number 65 song reach D door 1 per door One of the variation patterns among the per unit short and the third per unit of the song reach D door of variation number 66 is 14000/64000, 4000/64000, 19000/64000, and 4000/4000, respectively. , 19000/64000, and 4000/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B door first short per is selected with a probability of 14000/64000, the command 2FH corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per song reach B door first short is set as a production command and the fluctuation time A value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. When this song reach B door first short hit is selected, after the decorative design is displayed in a varying manner on the effect image display device 115, the song (B) is played and the super reach in the form where the character is singing on the stage is displayed. Then, the door of the stage is closed, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a short hit manner different from the long hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, and a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a corresponding variation time value is set in the timer.

  Next, the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. In the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 49, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 736 ( Step S15801). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S15801), a variation pattern table in the case where the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S15802). That is, when the time-short game is not executed by the time-short game execution means 736, the table 16 is selected regardless of whether or not the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 734 (see FIG. 50).

  If it is determined in step S15801 that the time reduction function is not inactive (NO in step S15801), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is not executed by the probability variation game execution means 734. Is determined (step S15803). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15803), a variation pattern table is selected when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation function is not activated (step S15804). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 736 and the probability change game is not executed by the probability change game execution means 734, the table 17 is selected (see FIG. 50).

  If it is determined in step S15801 that the time-shortening function is not activated (NO in step S15803), a variation pattern table at the time-shortening function activation and probability variation function activation is selected (step S15805). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 736 and the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 734, the table 18 is selected (see FIG. 50).

  When the table 16 is selected in the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern having the chance of variation number 44 is selected with a probability of 100% (that is, always). Then, command 2CH is set as an effect command, and 24600 ms is set as a variable time value in the timer. In this embodiment, the variation pattern of the chance number of the variation number 44 is the same as the variation pattern of the chance number of the variation number 43. As described above, in the normal game state in which the time-shortening function is not activated and the probability changing function is not activated, only one kind of small hit display mode is stored in the display mode storage unit 770.

  When the table 17 is selected in the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the song reach B intro of the variation number 24 and the song reach of the variation number 31 are acquired. Any variation pattern is selected with a probability of 40000/64000, 12000/64000, and 12000/64000, respectively, out of C intro and song reach D intro with variation number 38. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 40000/60000, the command 18H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the selected song reach B intro miss is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value as a timer. set. In this embodiment, the singing reach B intro of the variation number 24, the singing reach C intro of the variation number 31, and the singing reach D intro of the variation number 38 are respectively separated from the singing reach B intro of the variation number 23. It is the same mode as the variation pattern of the out of the song reach C intro of the variation number 30 and the out of the song reach D intro of the variation number 37.

  When the table 18 is selected in the short hit variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the first song reach B door of the variation number 49, the variation number 50 song reach B door per small, variable number 58 song reach C door first small hit, variable number 59 song reach C door second small hit, variable number 67 song reach D door first One variation pattern among the small hits and the second small hit of the song reach D door of the variation number 68 is 17000/64000, 14500/64000, 5000/64000, 11250/64000, Select with a probability of 5000/64000 and 11250/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B door first small hit is selected with a probability of 17000 of 64000, the command 31H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per song reach B door first small is set as a production command and the fluctuation time A value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. In addition, in this embodiment, the song reach B door 1 small hit per variation number 49, the song reach B door small per 50 variation number, the song reach C door 1 small per variation number 58, variation number The variation patterns of the 59 song reach C door second small hit, the variation number 67 song reach D door first small hit, and the variation number 68 song reach D door second small hit are the variation numbers, respectively. 47 song reach B doors per short short, variable number 48 song reach B doors per 3 shorts, variable number 56 song reach C doors per short, variable number 57 song reach C doors per 3 shorts The variation pattern is the same as the variation pattern per short of the song reach, the short reach of the song reach D door of the variation number 65, and the short variation of the song reach D door of the variation number 66.

  Next, the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 51, 52, 53, and 57. FIG. In the first special out-of-symbol variation pattern table setting process of FIGS. 51 and 52, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 736. It is determined whether or not (step S16001). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S 16001), then the number of first special symbols held immediately after the start of fluctuation (that is, the counter value by the first special symbol holding counter 703 (see FIG. 25)). It is determined whether it is 0 (step S 16002). If it is determined that the number of reserved first symbol symbols is zero (YES in step S 16002), it is determined whether or not reach variation is to be executed (step S 16003). Specifically, one reach random number is acquired from the reach random numbers from 0 to 240, and the acquired reach random number corresponds to a predetermined reach determination value (from 0 to 25 in the present embodiment). A so-called reach lottery is performed to determine whether or not. If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16003), and the table 19 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16004).

  Note that “the number of reserved first special symbols” means the number of reserved lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 700 in the present embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, although the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination of first special symbol 702, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol determination / rejection determination means 704 is suspended. The number of holdings for determination of success / failure by the determination unit 704 corresponds to the number of reservations for the first special symbol. Instead of this, when a game ball wins the first starting port 390, the acquisition of the random number for success / failure determination by the random number extracting means for determination 702 for the first special symbol may be suspended. In this case, the number of suspensions of acquisition of random numbers for success / failure determination by the random number extraction means for determination per first special symbol 702 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the first special symbol. Further, when the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination of first special symbol 702, and the random number for determination of success / failure acquired by the first special symbol determination of success / failure determination means 704 is obtained. However, it may be suspended to display the determination result on the first special symbol display 84. In this case, the number of suspensions of display on the first special symbol display 84 of the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the first special symbol.

  When it is determined in step S16003 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16003), the table 25 (see FIG. 57) is selected (step S16005).

  If it is determined in step S 16002 that the number of reserved first symbol symbols is not zero (NO in step S 16002), it is determined whether the number of reserved first symbol symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is 1 (step S 16006). . Here, if it is determined that the number of holds of the first special symbol is 1 (YES in step S16006), it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed, as in the case where the number of holds of the first special symbol is 1. (Step S16007). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16007), and the table 19 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16008). However, since the reach determination value when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 1 is from 0 to 23, in the reach lottery as compared with the case where the number of hold of the first special symbol is 0 (reach determination value is 0 to 25) The winning probability is low.

  When it is determined in step S16007 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16007), the table 25 (see FIG. 57) is selected (step S16009).

  If it is determined in step S16006 that the number of retained first special symbols is not 1 (NO in step S16006), it is determined whether the number of retained first special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is 2 (step S16010). . Here, if it is determined that the number of holds of the first special symbol is 2 (YES in step S16010), whether or not the reach variation is executed is determined as in the case where the number of holds of the first special symbol is 0 and 1. Judgment is made (step S16011). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16011), and the table 19 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16012). However, since the reach determination value is 0 to 21 when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is 2, the winning probability in the reach lottery is lower than when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is 0 and 1.

  When it is determined in step S16011 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16011), the table 26 (see FIG. 57) is selected (step S16013).

  If it is determined in step S16010 that the number of first special symbol hold is not 2 (NO in step S16014), it is determined that the number of first special symbol hold immediately after the start of fluctuation is 3, and the first special symbol hold is determined. As in the case where the numbers are 0, 1, and 2, it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed (step S16014). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16014), and the table 19 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16015). However, since the reach determination value is 0 to 15 when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 3, the winning probability in the reach lottery is lower than when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 0, 1, and 2.

  When it is determined in step S16014 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16014), the table 27 (see FIG. 57) is selected (step S16013).

  In this way, when the time-shortening function is not activated, the reach lottery between the number of the first special symbol hold and the winning probability in the reach lottery is more likely to win the reach lottery as the number of the first special symbol hold is smaller. There is a correlation that the more the number of reserved special symbols is, the more difficult it is to win a reach lottery. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the number of reserved first symbol symbols is 3, for example, the expectation of winning per long hit, short hit or small win increases, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest .

  If it is determined in step S 16001 that the time saving function is not inactive, that is, the time saving gaming state is set (NO in step S 16001), the processing shown in FIG. 52 is performed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is not activated, that is, whether or not the probability variation game by the probability variation game execution means 734 is not being executed (step S16017). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S16017), it is determined whether or not reach variation is performed (step S16018). The determination as to whether or not to execute the reach variation is performed in the same way as the determination of whether or not to execute the reach variation when the time reduction function is not activated (step S16003, step S16007, step S16011, step S16014). Depending on the result. If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16018), and the table 20 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16019).

  When it is determined in step S16018 that the reach fluctuation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16018), the table 28 (see FIG. 57) is selected (step S16020).

  If it is determined in step S16017 that the probability variation function is not inactive, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S16017), it is determined whether or not the reach variation is to be executed as in the case where the time reduction function is not activated. (Step S16021). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16021), and the table 21 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16022). However, when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation mechanism is not activated, that is, when the time variation function is not the probability variation gaming state, the reach judgment value is only 0 and 1. Therefore, the reach variation is smaller than when the time reduction function is not activated. The probability of being executed is very low. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the short-time function is activated and the probability variation mechanism is not activated, the expectation of winning the long hit, short hit or small hit increases, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When it is determined in step S16021 that the reach fluctuation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16021), the table 29 (see FIG. 57) is selected (step S16023).

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S16004, step S16005, step S16008, step S16009, step S16012, step S16013, step S16015, step S16016, step S16019, step S16020, step S16022, and step S16023, the first special symbol is lost. The time variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the table 19 (see FIG. 53) is selected in the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the variation number 8 is out of normal (1 Pre-design), variation number 9 out of normal (after one design), variation number 11 song reach A out (before encore), variation number 12 out of song reach A (after encore), variation number 14 song reach A long Deviating, singing reach B of variation number 16 (via singing reach A), detaching singing reach C of variation number 18 (via singing reach A), losing singing reach D of variation number 20 (via singing reach A), variation number 22 Singing reach B intro of change number 25, singing reach out of the first half of variation number 25, singing reach out of the second half of variation number 27, singing reach C intro of variation number 29, variation number 32 Out of the first half of the song reach C, out of the second half of the song reach C of the variation number 34, out of the song reach D of the variation number 36, out of the first half of the song reach D of the variation number 39, and out of the second half of the song reach D of the variation number 41 One of the fluctuation patterns is changed to 19000/14000, 14000/64000, 4000/64000, 4000/64000, 4000/44000, 64000/300, 64000/300, 64000/300, 64000, respectively. Select with a probability of 7000/6000, 2100/64000, 2100/64000, 3000/64000, 225/4000, 225/4000, 3000/6000, 225/4000, and 225/4000. . Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when normal deviation of variation number 8 (one symbol before) is selected with a probability of 19000 of 64000, command 08H corresponding to the variation pattern of normal deviation (one symbol before) is set as an effect command and variation time A value of 15600 ms is set in the timer. When this variation pattern of normal deviation (one symbol before) is selected, reach variation is executed after the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10) is started. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at a symbol that is not one of the small hits, and is one symbol before the reach symbol (for example, symbol 6 when symbol 7 is reached). Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, and a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in a timer.

  When the table 20 (see FIG. 53) is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B intro of the variation number 22 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. Out of the first half of the song reach B of the variation number 25, out of the second half of the song reach B of the variation number 27, out of the song reach C of the variation number 29, out of the first half of the song reach C of the variation number 32, the second half of the song reach C of the variation number 34 One of the fluctuation patterns of 100, 64000, 64000, and 65,000, respectively, out of the song reach D intro of variation number 36, out of the first half of song reach D of variation number 39, and out of the second half of song reach D of variation number 41. 25,000 / min, 25000/64000, 50/64000, 3450/64000, 345/64000 , 3450 of 50,64000 minutes of 64000 minutes, and, to select with a probability of 3450 of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when singing reach B out-of-track is selected as a variation pattern with a probability of 100/64000, the command 16H corresponding to the variation pattern of singing reach B out-of-tro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time timer. Set to. When this song reach B intro is selected, the intro of the song (B) is played with the reach effect after starting the change of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10), but before starting to sing. In addition, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a so-called unreachable manner that is different from both the big hit and the small win. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, and the command of the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and the variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 21 (see FIG. 53) is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B door of variation number 46 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. The variation patterns of the first one, the first song reach C door with the variation number 55, and the first variation of the song reach D door with the variation number 64 are 40000/60000 and 64,000 minutes, respectively. Select with a probability of 12000 and 12000 of 14000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the first pattern of song reach B door is selected as a variation pattern with a probability of 40000/64000, command 2EH corresponding to the variation pattern of song reach B door first image is set as a production command and the variation A time value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. When this song reach B door 1 is selected, the song (B) is played and the character is singing on the stage after the decoration pattern displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts changing. The super-reach of the aspect is displayed, and then the door of the stage is closed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a so-called reach-excluded manner in which the long win, the short win and the small win are different. Similarly, the variation pattern of the first singing reach C door and the first singing reach D door is also selected with a probability of 12000 of 14000, and the commands 37H and 40H of the selected variation pattern are set as production commands. At the same time, 18600 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

  In the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, when the table 25 (see FIG. 57) is selected, the variation pattern of the normal variation with the variation number 1 is always selected, and the table 26 (see FIG. 57) is selected. When the table 27 (see FIG. 57) is selected, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 2 with the variation number 3 is always selected and the table 28 (see FIG. 57) is always selected. Is selected, the variation pattern of the short shortening variation 2 of the variation number 7 is always selected, and when the table 29 (see FIG. 57) is selected, the variation pattern of the short shortening variation 1 of the variation number 5 is always selected.

  That is, in the first special symbol detachment variation pattern table setting process, if the time reduction function is not activated, the variation pattern according to the number of retained first special symbols (that is, the counter value by the first special symbol retention counter 703). Will be selected. Therefore, if the number of holds of the first special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 0 or 1, the normal change of the change number 1 is selected, the command 01H is set as an effect command, and the change time value is set to 11800 ms as a timer. set. When the first special symbol hold number immediately after the start of the change is 2, select the change pattern of the change 1 of the short change of the change number 2, set the command 02H as the production command, and set the change time value to 6000 ms as the timer set. If the number of the first special symbol hold immediately after the start of the change is 3, select the change pattern of the shortened change 2 of the change number 3, set the command 03H as the effect command, and set 2900ms as the change time value to the timer set. In the normal variation, the shortening variation 1 and the shortening variation 2, after the start of the variation of the decoration symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115, the decoration is different from the long hit, short hit and small hit without the reach effect. Stop displaying symbols.

  In the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, if the operation is short-time, whether or not the probability variation function is activated regardless of the number of first special symbols held, that is, probability variation game execution means. At 734, the variation pattern is selected according to whether or not the probability variation game is being executed. Accordingly, when the probability variation function is not activated, the time shortening variation 2 of the variation number 7 is selected, the command 07H is set as the effect command, and 2300 ms is set as the variation time value in the timer. When the probability variation function is in operation, the short shortening variation 1 of the variation number 5 is selected, the command 05H is set as an effect command, and 2200 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer.

  Next, the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 54, 55, 56 and 57. FIG. 54 and 55, in the second special symbol out-of-symbol variation pattern table setting process, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 736. It is determined whether or not (step S16101). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S16101), the table 22 is selected (step S16102). Although details will be described later, since a deviation variation pattern that does not involve a reach effect is not set in the table 22, a reach effect is always performed when the table 22 is selected.

  If it is determined in step S16101 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, the time-saving game is being executed by the time-saving game execution means 736 (NO in step S16101), the processing shown in FIG. 55 is performed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is not activated, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 734 (step S16103). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S16103), it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed (step S16104). Specifically, in the same manner as the reach lottery in the second special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, a reach random number from zero to 240 is acquired, and the acquired reach random number is a predetermined reach determination value (this embodiment) In the embodiment, a reach lottery is performed to determine whether or not 0 and 1). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16104), and the table 23 (see FIG. 56) is selected (step S16105).

  When it is determined in step S16104 that the reach change is not performed, that is, when the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16104), the number of second special symbols held immediately after the start of the change (ie, the second special symbol hold counter 713). It is determined whether or not the counter value (see FIG. 25) is 0 (step S16106). If it is determined that the second special symbol hold number immediately after the start of fluctuation is 0 (YES in step S16106), table 30 is selected (step S16107), and if the second special symbol hold number is not zero (step S16106) The table 31 is selected (NO in S16106) (step S16108).

  In the present embodiment, “the number of second special symbol reservations” means the number of lottery reservations by the second special symbol lottery means 710. That is, in this embodiment, although the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained by the random number extraction means for determination of second special symbol 712, the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol determination / rejection determination means 714 is suspended. The number of reservations for determination of success / failure by the determination unit 714 corresponds to the number of reservations for the second special symbol. Instead of this, the acquisition of random numbers for determination of success / failure by the second special symbol determination random number extracting means 712 may be suspended when a game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. . In this case, the number of suspensions of acquisition of random numbers for success / failure determination by the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the second special symbol. Further, when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the second special symbol hit determination random number extracting means 712 acquires the pass / fail determination random number and the second special symbol pass / fail determination means 714 Although it is determined whether or not the obtained random number for determining whether or not is correct, displaying the determination result on the second special symbol display 86 may be suspended. In this case, the number of suspensions of display on the second special symbol display 86 of the determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S16103 that the probability variation function is not inoperative, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S16103), it is determined whether or not to execute reach variation as in the case where the probability variation function is not activated. Judgment is made (step S16109). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16109), and the table 24 (see FIG. 56) is selected. However, the reach determination value is 0 only when the short time function is activated and the probability variation function is activated in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process.

  When it is determined in step S16109 that the reach variation is not to be executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16109), the number of second special symbols held immediately after the start of the variation (that is, the second special symbol hold counter 713 ( It is determined whether or not the counter value (see FIG. 25) is 0 (step S16111). When it is determined that the number of reserved special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is zero (YES in step S16111), table 32 is selected (step S16112), and when the number of reserved special symbols is not zero (step S16112). The table 33 is selected (NO in S16111) (step S16113).

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S16102, step S16105, step S16107, step S16108, step S16110, step S16112, and step S16113, the second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  It should be noted that when the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, when the time-shortening game is not being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 736, as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. In the table setting process, a reach lottery is performed (step S16003), and the table 19 in which only the reach effect is set as a variation pattern is selected in response to the winning of the reach lottery (step S16004), while the second In the special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, the table 22 in which only the reach effect is set as the variation pattern is selected without performing the reach lottery (step S16102). Accordingly, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the time reduction function is not activated, the reach variation is always executed. Thereby, when the time-shortening function is not activated, the second start port 392 and the third start port 394 become more prestigious than the first start port 390, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

When the table 22 (see FIG. 56) is selected in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number,
Variation number 73 out of normal (one symbol before), variation number 74 out of normal (after one symbol), variation number 76 out of song reach A (before encore), variation number 77 out of song reach A (after encore), Song reach A with a variable number of 79 is long off, Song reach B with a variable number 81 (via song reach A), Song reach C with a variable number 83 (via song reach A), Song reach D with a variable number 85 (song reach) (Via A), the fluctuation patterns of 27500/64000, 27500/64000, 2000/44000, 2000/64000, 4400/64000, 400/44000, 100/64000, respectively. And 100/64000 probability. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when normal out (one symbol before) is selected with a probability of 27500 of 64000, the command 49H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of normal out (one symbol before) is set as a production command, and the variation time value is 9500 ms. Set to timer. When the variation pattern of this normal deviation (one symbol before) is selected, reach variation is executed after the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115 is started. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol one before the reach symbol (for example, symbol 6 when symbol 7 is reached). Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, and a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in a timer.

  When the table 23 (see FIG. 56) is selected in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and the song reach B intro of the variation number 22 is obtained based on the obtained variation pattern random number. Out of the first half of the song reach B of the variation number 25, out of the second half of the song reach B of the variation number 27, out of the song reach C of the variation number 29, out of the first half of the song reach C of the variation number 32, the second half of the song reach C of the variation number 34 One of the fluctuation patterns of 100, 64000, 64000, and 65,000, respectively, out of the song reach D intro of variation number 36, out of the first half of song reach D of variation number 39, and out of the second half of song reach D of variation number 41. 25,000 / min, 25000/64000, 50/64000, 3450/64000, 345/64000 , 3450 of 50,64000 minutes of 64000 minutes, and, to select with a probability of 3450 of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when song reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 100/64000, command 16H corresponding to the variation pattern of song reach B intro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value in a timer. . When the variation pattern of the song reach B intro is selected, the decorative pattern displayed on the effect image display device 115 is displayed in a variable manner, and then the intro of the song (B) is played with the reach effect, but before the singing starts. The decorative design is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the long hit, short hit and small hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are also selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 24 (see FIG. 56) is selected in the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B door of variation number 46 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. The variation patterns of the first one, the first song reach C door with the variation number 55, and the first variation of the song reach D door with the variation number 64 are 40000/60000 and 64,000 minutes, respectively. Select with a probability of 12000 and 12000 of 14000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the first pattern of the song reach B door is selected with a probability of 40000/64000 as the variation pattern, the command 2EH corresponding to the variation pattern of the first song reach B door out of the first set is set as a production command. Then, 21800 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. When this song reach B door 1 is selected, the decorative pattern displayed on the effect image display device 115 is displayed in a variable manner, and then the song (B) is played and the character is singing on the stage. After that, the door of the stage is closed, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the long hit, short hit and small hit. Similarly, the variation pattern of the first singing reach C door and the first singing reach D door is selected with a probability of 12000/64000, and the commands 37H and 40H corresponding to the variation pattern are set as production commands. At the same time, 18600 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

  When the table 30 (see FIG. 57) is selected in the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern of the short time normal variation 2 of the variation number 6 is always selected, and the table 31 (see FIG. 57) is selected. When this is done, the fluctuation pattern of the short time fluctuation 2 of the fluctuation number 7 is always selected, and when the table 32 (see FIG. 57) is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short time normal fluctuation 1 of the fluctuation number 4 is always selected. 57 is always selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short shortening fluctuation 1 of the fluctuation number 5 is selected. When the table 33 (see FIG. 57) is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short time normal fluctuation 2 of the fluctuation number 6 is always selected. select.

  That is, in the variation pattern table setting process at the time of the second special symbol outage, if the operation is short-time, the variation pattern is selected according to the number of the second special symbol held (that is, the counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 713). Will be. Therefore, if the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 0 and the probability change function is not activated, the short normal change 2 of the change number 6 is selected, and the command 06H is set as an effect command. At the same time, 5200 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

  Also, if the number of reserved special symbols immediately after the start of variation is 0 and the probability variation function is activated, the short normal variation 1 of variation number 4 is selected, and command 04H is set as an effect command. At the same time, 4800 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. On the other hand, if the number of holdings of the second special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 1, 2 or 3, and the probability change function is not activated, the time shortening change 2 of the change number 7 is selected, and the command 07H is used as an effect command. At the same time, 2300 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. Also, if the number of reserved 2nd special symbols immediately after the start of the change is 1, 2 or 3, and the probability change function is activated, select the short shortening change 1 of the change number 5 and set the command 05H as an effect command. In addition, 2200 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

  Thus, when the probability variation function is not activated, when the variation number 6 is selected, the variation time becomes longer than when the variation number 7 is selected, and when the probability variation function is activated, the variation number 4 is When selected, the variation time becomes longer than when variation number 5 is selected. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the probability variation function is activated, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation time is zero when the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is 1, 2, or 3. become longer. As a result, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation time will be longer when the number of reserved second symbol symbols is 0 than when 1, 2, or 3, so that the decoration symbol will not vary. It can suppress the decrease of interest by. That is, during the short-time operation, the pair of movable pieces 396 are opened and closed, so that the game balls that are driven toward the game area 37 are more likely to win the third start port 394 than the first start port 390. When the short-time function is activated, the number of the second special symbol is generally larger than the number of the first special symbol. Therefore, if the number of the second special symbol is zero, the first special symbol is reserved. The number is also likely to be zero. Therefore, the fall of interest can be suppressed by lengthening the fluctuation time when the number of reserved special symbols is zero. In all of the variation numbers 4, 5, 6 and 7, after starting the variation of the decorative design displayed on the effect image display device 115, the reach design is not accompanied by the reach effect, and the decorative design is changed to a short hit and short. The stop display is performed in a manner different from both winning and small winning.

  As described above, the variation pattern setting process described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 57 is summarized as follows.

  When the big win is won in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, and the winning big hit is the long win, the first display mode determining means 772 is the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 614. The table (one of Tables 1 to 6) determined based on the game state when winning per long and the type per long (per short length or normal length per probability change) A predetermined per-length display mode is selected and determined from the long-length display modes stored in the table (step S1540). Each of the tables 1 to 6 stores a plurality of per-length display modes.

  When the jackpot is won in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, and the winning jackpot is short hit, the first display mode determining means 772 is the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 614. The display mode to be displayed on the table is determined based on the gaming state when the short win is won (one of the tables 13 to 15) stored in the short win display mode stored in the predetermined short win The display mode is selected and determined (step S1560). Each of the tables 13 to 15 stores a plurality of short hit display modes.

  When the big win is won in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, and the small win is won, the first display mode determining means 772 displays the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 614. The display mode is changed to a predetermined small hit display mode from among the small hit display modes stored in the table (any one of the tables 16 to 18) determined based on the gaming state when winning the small hit. The selection is determined (step S1580). Each of the tables 16 to 18 stores a plurality of small hit display modes.

  In the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when the big win is lost, and the small bonus is also lost, the first special symbol image display control means 614 displays a display mode to be displayed in the common symbol display area 115c. Outgoing display mode or reach miss stored in a table (table 19 or any one of tables 25 to 27) determined based on the gaming state when played (ie, when the lottery result is missed) A predetermined out-of-display mode or reach out-of-reach display mode is determined from the display modes (step S1600). Specifically, in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when a big win is lost and even a small win is lost, a lottery for determining whether or not a reach effect is performed (step S16003, step S16007, step S16011, step S16014). ), And any of the tables 25 to 27 is selected based on the counter value of the first special symbol holding counter 703 (step S16005, step S16009, step S16013, step S16016) When the reach lottery is won, the table 19 is selected (step S16004, step S16008, step S16012, step S16015). That is, when the lottery is lost, one of the tables 25 to 27 is selected on the basis of the number of holds, and the off display mode stored in the selected table is displayed. When the reach lottery is won, the predetermined reach out display mode is selected from the plurality of reach out display modes stored in the table 19.

  In the lottery performed by the second special symbol lottery means 710, when the jackpot is won, and the winning jackpot is a long win, the second display mode determining means 778 uses the second special symbol image display control means 615 to display the common symbol display area 115c. The table (one of Tables 7 to 12) determined based on the game state when winning per long and the type per long (per short length or normal length per probability change) A special display mode per length is selected and determined from the special display modes per length stored in the table (step S1550). Each of the tables 7 to 12 stores a plurality of special display modes per length.

  In the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, when the big win is lost, and the small bonus is also lost, the second special symbol image display control means 615 displays a display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c. Reach out special display stored in a table (one of tables 22 to 24 and tables 30 to 33) determined based on the gaming state when it is performed (ie, when the lottery result is out) A predetermined reach out special display mode or out special display mode is determined from the modes or out special display modes (step S1600). Specifically, if the time reduction function is not activated when a lottery with a lottery result being out is performed, the table 22 is selected, and a predetermined one of the plurality of reach-off special display modes stored in the table 22 is selected. Is determined to be a special display mode out of reach. On the other hand, if the time reduction function is activated when the lottery with the lottery result being out is performed, the reach lottery is performed. If the reach lottery is won, the table 23 or the table 24 is selected based on the gaming state. (Step S16105, Step S16110). In addition, if the draw is lost in the reach lottery, any of the tables 30 to 33 is determined based on the gaming state and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 (steps S16107, 16108, step S16112, step S16113).

  In the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, when the jackpot is won and the winning jackpot is short hit, the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 615, Similar to the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 614 when the lottery result by the one special symbol lottery means 700 is short-winning, the gaming state when the short-winning is won Is determined to be any one of the tables 13 to 15, and a predetermined short hit display mode is selected and determined from the determined tables (step S1560).

  The first special symbol is displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 615 when the big special is lost in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 and the bonus is won. Similar to the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control unit 614 when the lottery result by the lottery unit 700 is a small hit, based on the gaming state when the small lottery is won. Any one of the tables 16 to 18 is determined, and a predetermined small hit display mode is selected and determined from the determined tables (step S1580).

  Note that the short win display mode and the small win display mode are not limited to the same display mode in the case of being based on the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and in the case of being based on the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710. However, the display modes may be very similar to each other, for example, the variation times are slightly different.

  In the present embodiment, “immediately after the start of variation” means immediately after the first special symbol counter or the second special symbol counter is subtracted in the variation start processing (step S130).

[In-flight processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). That is, it is determined whether either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is changing. If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. That is, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S1802), the changing process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 (both see FIG. 25) in the changing one of the first special symbol indicator 84 or the second special symbol indicator 86. The result is derived and displayed, and a change stop command is output to the peripheral control board 610.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is started. If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1804), it is next determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1806). That is, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is started as a result of the current fluctuation being stopped and the lottery result being derived. If it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1807), and the changing process is terminated. If it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, an example of the jackpot game start process will be described based on FIG. In this jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). Specifically, whether or not the probability variation game execution means 734 controls the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714, that is, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 704. It is determined whether or not the determination of success / failure by the symbol success / failure determination means 714 (see FIG. 25 for both) is made based on the special symbol probability change time determination table 708. If it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S2001), the operation of the probability variation function is stopped (step S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation function is not in operation (NO in step S2001), the process directly proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is operating. Specifically, whether or not the short-time game execution means 736 controls the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 (both see FIG. 25), that is, whether or not the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 determines whether or not the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 It is determined whether or not to make a determination based on the determination table. If it is determined that the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S2003), the operation of the time reduction function is stopped (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving function is not operating (NO in step S2003), the process directly proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether or not it is a long hit. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the long hit flag is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that the long hit flag is ON. If it is determined that it is per long (YES in step S2005), the number of rounds per long, the opening time per round, the limit number are set, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set. Specifically, the number of rounds is set to 15 rounds, for example, the opening time per round is set to 30 seconds, the limited number is set to 9 pieces, and the opening / closing device to be opened is for production in the first round and the second round, for example. The opening / closing device 398 is set, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is set for the 3rd to 14th rounds, and the effect opening / closing device 398 (see FIG. 10) is set for the 15th round. If it is determined that it is not long hit, the number of short hit rounds, the opening time per round, the limit number are set, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set. Specifically, the number of rounds is set to, for example, 2 rounds, the opening time per round is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds, the limited number is set to, for example, 3, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set to the effect opening / closing device 398, for example. .

  When the number of rounds, the opening time per round, the limit number, and the opening / closing device to be opened are set in either step S2006 or step S2007, the processing flag is updated to “5” (step S2008), and the jackpot game starts The process ends.

[Small hit game start processing]
Next, an example of the small hit game start process will be described with reference to FIG. In the small hit game starting process, first, the number of small hits released, the opening time per time, the limit number, and the opening device to be opened are set (step S2201). Specifically, the number of times of opening is set to, for example, 2 times, the opening time per time is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds, the limit number is set to, for example, 3 and the opening device to be opened is set to the effect opening / closing device 398. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” and the small hit game start process is terminated.

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the special electric utility jackpot control process, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing device 397 is open (step S2401). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is open. If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2401), then whether or not the opening time of the predetermined opening / closing device 397 (the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400) has elapsed. Is determined (step S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time set in the jackpot game start process has been reached. If it is determined that the opening time of the switchgear 397 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), the switchgear 397 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2402 that the opening time of the opening / closing device 397 has not elapsed (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether a predetermined limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 (step S2403). . Specifically, the limited number of game balls set in the jackpot game start process are the opening / closing device 397 in which the opening operation is executed (when the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed, the opening / closing device for the effect) 398, when the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is being executed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 has been accepted. If it is determined that a limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 that is performing the opening operation (YES in step S2403), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is performed. finish. If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 has not received a limited number of game balls (NO in step S2403), the special electric utility big hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2401), it is determined whether a predetermined number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process has been reached. If it is determined that the predetermined number of rounds has not been reached (NO in step S2405), a predetermined opening device among the effect opening / closing device 398 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is opened (step S2406). The special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2405 that the predetermined number of rounds has been reached (YES in step S2405), the jackpot flag is turned off (step S2407), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is accompanied by a probability fluctuation ( Step S2408). Specifically, when it is determined that the result determined using the design random number is a probability variation, it is determined that the probability variation is accompanied. If it is determined that the jackpot is accompanied by a probability fluctuation (YES in step S2408), the probability fluctuation function is activated (step S2409), and then it is determined whether the jackpot is a long hit. Specifically, if the long hit flag is ON, it is determined that the long hit is reached. If it is determined that it is a long hit (YES in step S2410), the long hit flag is turned OFF (step S2411), then the time reduction function is activated (step S2412), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that it is not long hit (NO in step S2410), the short hit flag is turned off (step S2413), and then it is determined whether or not the winning operation is in the short-time function operation (step S2414). That is, when the short hit is made, the short hit flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S2414 to determine whether or not the short time function is in operation. If it is determined that the winning function is in operation (YES in step S2414), the operation of the shortening function is started (step S2412), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  Returning to step S2408, if it is determined that the jackpot is not accompanied by probability fluctuation (NO in step S2408), the long hit flag is turned off (step S2415), the operation of the time reduction function is started (step S2416), and the time reduction function is activated. A prescribed number of operations (for example, 100) is set (step S2417), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  In step S2418, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special symbol electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. The special electric accessory is a concept including an effect opening / closing device 398, a jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, an effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 578, and a jackpot gaming opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 572.

[Special electric accessory small hit control processing]
Next, based on FIG. 62, an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process will be described. In this special electric accessory small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 (step S2501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a limited number (for example, three) of game balls set in the small hit game start process has been received by the opening / closing device 397. If it is determined that a limited number of game balls are not received by the opening / closing device 397 (NO in step S2501), it is determined whether the opening / closing device 397 is open (step S2502). If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2502), a predetermined opening / closing device (for example, the opening / closing device for effect 398) is opened (step S2503) among the effect opening / closing device 398 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. ), The special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2502 that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2502), it is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time of the opening / closing device (for example, the effect opening / closing device 398) has elapsed (step S2504). . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time (for example, 0.3 seconds) set in the small hit game start process has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time of the predetermined opening / closing device 397 has not elapsed (NO in step S2504), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S2504 that the predetermined opening time of the opening / closing device 397 has elapsed (YES in step S2504), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2505), and it is determined whether a predetermined number of times of opening has been reached. (Step S2506). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times of opening / closing device 397 has reached the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) set in the small hit game start procedure. At this time, if it is determined that the predetermined number of times of opening has not been reached (NO in step S2506), the electric accessory small hit control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times of opening / closing device 397 has reached a predetermined number of times of opening (YES in step S2506), the process proceeds to step S2509.

  Returning to step S2501, if it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 has received a limited number of game balls (YES in step S2501), it is determined whether the opening / closing device 397 is being opened (step S2507). If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2507), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2508), and the process proceeds to step S2509. Returning to step S2507, if it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2507), the process directly proceeds to step S2509.

  In step S2509, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special electric accessory small hitting control process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the opening time of the switchgear is set to 0.3 seconds, for example. In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of winnings (for example, 3) has been won in the switchgear. If the maximum number of winnings has been won, the number of times that the predetermined number of opening (for example, 2) has not been reached is small The hit game ends. However, since the opening time of the switchgear in the small hit game is set so that it is extremely difficult to win the maximum number of winnings, in most cases the predetermined number of opening without winning the maximum winnings The opening / closing device is opened (for example, twice).

[About fluctuation time]
Next, based on FIG. 63, an example of the fluctuation time concerning the deviation fluctuation pattern when the time-shortening function is not operated will be described. FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing the variation time according to the unsuccessful variation pattern without the reach effect when the short-time function is not activated. FIG. 63A shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved first symbol symbols is 0 or 1 (that is, the variation time for the normal variation of variation number 1). The variation time in this case is 11800 ms. FIG. 63 (B) shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is 2 (that is, the variation time in the case of the short variation 1 of the variation number 2). The variation time in this case is 6000 ms. FIG. 63C shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved first symbol symbols is 3 (that is, the variation time in the case of the short variation 2 of the variation number 3). The variation time in this case is 2900 ms. From the above, in the case of a detachment that does not involve a reach effect when the time-shortening function is not activated, the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer as the number of retained first special symbols is smaller. When the time-shortening function is not activated, it is more difficult for a game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 to win the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 than to win the first start port 390. When the number of reservations for the first special symbol becomes zero, the possibility that the number of reservations for the second special symbol is also zero is high. If both the hold of the first special symbol and the hold of the second special symbol become 0, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, in the case of a detachment that does not involve a reach effect when the time-shortening function is not activated, a decrease in interest can be suppressed by increasing the variation time of the first special symbol as the number of first special symbol reservations decreases.

  63D and 63E show the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation time in the case of the variation number 73 and the variation number 74). When the time-shortening function is not activated and the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is out of place, any of FIGS. 63 (D) and 63 (E), regardless of the number of second special symbols held. It will be the fluctuation time. Therefore, there is no correlation between the number of reserved special symbols and the variation time of the second special symbol, and the variation time of the second special symbol is determined regardless of the number of retained special symbols. In addition, when the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is out of the range (not long hit, short hit or small hit), the variation number 73 or the variation number 74 is selected. Is executed. In addition, since the pair of movable pieces 396 are closed when the time-shortening function is not activated, it is almost impossible for the game ball that has been driven toward the game area 37 to win the third starting port 394. In addition, since it is more difficult for a game ball to win the second start port 392 than to win a game ball to the first start port 390, the game ball that has been driven toward the game area 37 enters the second start port 392. By always changing the reach when winning a prize, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the winning to the second start port 392 and to suppress a decrease in interest. Note that the variation time in the case of FIG. 63D is 9500 ms, and the variation time in the case of FIG. 63E is 11300 ms.

  Next, based on FIG. 64, a description will be given of a variation time required for a deviation variation pattern without a reach effect at the time-shortening function operation. FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing the variation time according to the unsuccessful variation pattern without the reach effect when the short-time function is activated. FIG. 64 (A) shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the probability variation function is activated (that is, the time shortening variation 1 of the variation number 5). The variation time in this case is 2200 ms. FIG. 64 (B) shows the variation time of the second special symbol when the probability variation function is not activated (that is, the time shortening variation 2 of the variation number 7). The variation time in this case is 2300 ms. Therefore, although the variation time of the first special symbol varies depending on whether the probability variation function is not activated or activated, there is a correlation between the number of reserved first symbol symbols and the variation time of the first special symbol. Instead, it is determined regardless of the number of reserved first symbols.

  FIG. 64C shows the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the short time normal variation 1 of the variation number 4) when the probability variation function is activated and the number of reserved second symbol symbols is zero. . The variation time in this case is 4800 ms. FIG. 64 (D) shows the variation time of the second special symbol when the probability variation function is activated and the number of retained second special symbols is 1 or more (that is, the short time variation 1 of variation number 5). Yes. The variation time in this case is 2200 ms. FIG. 64 (E) shows the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the short time normal variation 2 of the variation number 6) when the probability changing function is not activated and the number of reserved second special symbols is 0. Yes. The variation time in this case is 5200 ms. FIG. 64 (F) shows the variation time of the second special symbol when the probability variation function is not activated and the number of retained second special symbols is 1 or more (that is, the short-time variation 2 of variation number 7). ing. The variation time in this case is 2300 ms. From the above, in the case of a departure without a reach effect at the time-shortening function operation, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes longer as the number of second special symbols held is smaller. More specifically, when the number of reservations of the second special symbol is 0, the number of reservations of the second special symbol is longer than that when it is 1 or more. Since the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 396 is executed at the time-shortening function operation, the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 is much easier than winning the first start port 390. It becomes possible to win 394. Therefore, when the number of reservations of the second special symbol becomes zero, there is a high possibility that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is also zero. If both the hold of the first special symbol and the hold of the second special symbol become 0, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, in the case of detachment without a reach effect at the time-shortening function operation, the variation time of the second special symbol when the second special symbol hold number is 0, and the second special symbol hold number is one or more By making it longer than the variation time of the second special symbol in, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Variation of decorative symbols displayed on effect image display device]
Next, the decorative design 1153 displayed on the effect image display device 115 will be described based on FIG. 65 and FIG. The decorative symbols are composed of a plurality of symbol sequences. In this embodiment, the left symbol sequence 1153a displayed on the left side as viewed from the player, the middle symbol sequence 1153b displayed in the middle as viewed from the player, And, it is composed of three symbol rows of right symbol row 1153c displayed on the right side as viewed from the player.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115. That is, FIG. 65 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 65 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 during change, and FIG. 65 (C) is a decorative symbol. FIG. 65D is a diagram showing a mode after the fluctuation stop of 1153, FIG. 65D is a diagram showing a mode for deriving that it is reach, and FIG. 65E is a diagram showing a mode in which the decorative symbol 1153 after the reach is changing. FIG. As shown in FIG. 65 (B), the decorative symbol 1153 changes in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). This is a scroll fluctuation that scrolls in the direction of heading. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the fluctuation in which the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c stop at different symbols that are completely unrelated is the “reach” in this embodiment. It is “out-of-range fluctuation without production”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), when the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are the same, reach is derived, and as shown in FIG. 65 (E). Only the middle symbol row 1153b scrolls. As a result, the variation of the decoration symbol 1153 when only the stop symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b is different is the “displacement variation with reach effect” in the present embodiment, and the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b. The variation of the decorative symbol 1153 when all the symbol columns 1153b stop at the same symbol is the “big hit variation” in the present embodiment.

  Further, the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115 is scrolled in the vertical direction regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated. Scroll fluctuation.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result is derived to the effect image display device 115 when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out of place when the time-shortening function is not activated. . That is, FIG. 66 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect before the decoration pattern 1153 starts to change, FIG. 66 (B) is a figure showing an aspect in which the decoration pattern 1153 is changing, and FIG. 66 (C) is a reach. FIG. 66 (D) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving a certain situation, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 66 (B), the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is such that the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are substantially at the same position as the stop position (the position shown in FIG. 66 (A)) before the change starts. While rotating, the front and back surfaces are alternately displayed while staying, and the middle symbol row 1153b is scroll fluctuation that scrolls in the vertical direction as in the mode shown in FIG. 65 (B). Then, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c stop rotating almost simultaneously, and then the middle symbol row 1153b stops.

  In this case, the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are always the same symbol, reach is derived as shown in FIG. 66 (C), and further as shown in FIG. 66 (D). In addition, only the middle symbol row 1153b scrolls. As a result, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), when only the stop symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b is different, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect” in the present embodiment. If the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b all stop at the same symbol due to the scroll variation shown in FIG. 66 (D), the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit” in this embodiment. Fluctuation ".

  Here, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the effect image display device 115 when the short-time function is activated, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 is produced by the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700. The variation pattern of the decorative pattern 1153 when derived to the image display device 115 is substantially the same. That is, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is a scroll variation in which all of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are scrolled in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). It is. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.

  As described above, if the time-shortening function is not activated, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. The variation pattern of the decorative design 1153 when the lottery result is derived to the effect image display device 115 is different. On the other hand, if the time shortening function is activated, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115 and the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710. The variation pattern of the decorative design 1153 when the result is derived to the effect image display device 115 is substantially the same.

  Further, as described above, the information indicating that the second special symbol hold counter 713 holds the information when the time-shortening function is not operated is displayed in the second display mode (the mode in which the character is displayed) in the hold display area 1150. The On the other hand, the information indicating that the second special symbol hold counter 713 is on hold at the time-shortening function operation is the third mode indicating that the second special symbol hold counter 703 is on hold (that is, the character display disappears). Display in the same mode as the above mode).

  From the above, if the time reduction function is not activated, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is the effect image display device. The variation pattern of the decorative pattern 1153 differs depending on the case of being derived to 115. Also, a display mode of information indicating that the information is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 displayed in the hold display area 1150 and a second special symbol hold counter 713 displayed in the hold display area 1150 It is also different from the display mode of information indicating that there is. On the other hand, when the short-time function is activated, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is output to the effect image display device 115. In the derived case, the display mode of the information indicating that the decoration pattern 1153 is changed and the special symbol hold counters 703 and 713 displayed in the hold display area 1150 are held are substantially the same.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result is derived to the effect image display device 115 when the lottery result by the special symbol lottery means 700 and 710 is short hit or small hit. . That is, when the lottery result is a short hit or a small hit, both the same lots are drawn from the same table 13 regardless of whether the lottery is by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710. Since it is selected, the same variation mode is performed.

  67 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative pattern 1153 before the start of variation, FIGS. 67 (B) to (G) are diagrams illustrating an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 during variation, and FIG. 67 (H) is It is a figure which shows the aspect after the fluctuation | variation stop of the decoration design 1153. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (B), the decorative symbol 1153 changes in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). This is a scroll fluctuation that scrolls in the direction of heading. As shown in FIG. 67D, after the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are displayed larger than the display of the middle symbol row 1153b, the wife runs and stops in the left symbol row 1153a (see FIG. 67). 67 (E)), then the wife runs on the right symbol row 1153c (see FIG. 67 (F)) and stops (FIG. 67 (G)). As shown in FIG. 67 (G), the “song” symbol is stopped on the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped on the right symbol row 1153c, and only the middle symbol row 1153b is scrolled vertically. The aspect to do is reach variation that may be won per short, small or probable length. As shown in FIG. 67 (H), when the “legend” symbol stops in the middle symbol row 1153b, the occurrence of the short hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state, or the long hit gaming state is determined.

  Next, based on FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, the fluctuation | variation aspect of the decoration design 1153 is demonstrated. FIG. 68 is a functional block diagram mainly showing a function related to display mode determination in the functional configuration of the main control board 510. FIG. 69 is a time chart showing the display modes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 68, when a game ball wins the first start port 390 and is detected by the first start port sensor 580, the first special symbol lottery means 700 performs the lottery as described above. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the first special symbol determination determination random number extraction means 702, and the acquired random number value and the determination table for the determination of success / failure (special symbol normal) Based on the hourly determination table 706 or the special symbol probability changing time determination table 708), the first special symbol determination unit 704 determines whether or not the first special symbol is correct.

  Further, the main control board 510 has first display mode determining means 772 and second display mode determining means 778. The first display mode determination unit 772 uses a plurality of types (two types) stored in the display mode storage unit 770 as display modes derived to the effect image display device 115 by the first special symbol image display control unit 614 (see FIG. 29). Select and decide from the above display modes. The second display mode determining means 778 has a plurality of types (two types) stored in the display mode storage means 770 for the display mode derived to the effect image display device 115 by the second special symbol image display control means 615 (see FIG. 29). Select and decide from the above display modes.

  And based on the result determination by the first special symbol determination unit 704 or the second special symbol determination unit 714, one of the plurality of display modes stored in the display mode storage unit 770 is displayed. The selection is determined, and the command transmission means 746 transmits a command to the peripheral control board 610. The peripheral control board 610 that has received such a command controls display of the display mode selected and determined by the effect image display control means 616 on the effect image display device 115.

  Specifically, the 1st display mode determination means 772 judges whether the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means 700 is winning. On the other hand, the 2nd display mode determination means 778 judges whether the lottery by the 2nd special symbol lottery means 710 is winning.

  The first display mode determination unit 772 includes a first display mode determination selection unit 773, a reach out display mode selection determination unit 774, a win display mode selection determination unit 775, a out display mode determination unit 776, and an advantageous gaming state out-of-display display mode determination unit. 777.

  When the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 0 or 1 in the normal gaming state, the come-off display mode determination unit 776 displays the off-display mode only when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery unit 700 is out. When the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is 2, it is determined as a shortening variation 1, and when the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is 3 at the maximum, it is determined as a shortening variation 2. .

  The advantageous game state out-of-game display mode determining means 777 is a time-shortening variation only in the short-time gaming state, regardless of the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out. Set to 1 (when the probability variation function is activated) or 2 to shorten the time reduction variation (when the probability variation function is not activated).

  The first display mode determination / selection unit 773 selects which one of the outlier display mode determination unit 776 and the advantageous gaming state outlier display mode determination unit 777 determines the display mode derived to the common symbol display area 115c. The first display mode determination / selection means 773 selects the advantageous game state out-of-play display mode determination means 777 in the advantageous game state, and the advantageous game state in accordance with the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state. Instead of the detachment display mode determination unit 777, the detachment display mode determination unit 776 is selected.

  Reach out-of-reach display mode selection deciding means 774 performs a display in the out-of-reach display mode in a lottery that is different from the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is off. Only when one of them is selected and determined, one of the two or more reach out-of-reach display modes is further selected and determined. The winning display mode selection determining means 776 selects and determines one long winning display mode from two or more long winning display modes when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is winning. To do.

  The second display mode determining means 778 includes a reach out special display mode selection determining unit 780, a hit special display mode selection determining unit 781, a special off display display determining unit 782, and an advantageous gaming state shortening out display mode determining unit 783. Yes.

  The reach out special display mode selection determining unit 780 selects and determines one of the reach out special display modes from among two or more types of reach out special modes when the second special symbol lottery unit 710 is out of the lottery. To do.

  When the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is winning, the winning special display mode selection determining unit 781 selects and determines one of the hit special display modes from two or more types of winning special display modes.

  The special display mode determining means 782 is a short reach special display only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out, regardless of the number of holds by the second special symbol holding counter 713 in the normal gaming state. The mode or the long reach off special display mode is determined.

  Advantageous gaming state shortening out display mode determining means 783 is only in the case of the short-time gaming state, when the number of holds by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is 0, only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out. Time short normal fluctuation 1 (when probability fluctuation is activated) or time short normal fluctuation 2 (when probability fluctuation is not in operation) is determined, and when the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is any one of 1 to 3, the time is shortened. Change 1 (when probability fluctuation is activated) or shortened time fluctuation 2 (when probability fluctuation is not activated).

  The second display mode determination / selection unit 779 selects which one of the special display mode determination unit 782 and the advantageous game state shortening / exclusion display mode determination unit 783 determines the display mode to be derived to the common symbol display area 115c. . The second display mode determination / selection means 779 selects the advantageous game state shortening display mode determination means 783 in the advantageous game state, and at the same time, the advantageous game is changed from the advantageous game state to the normal game state. In place of the state shortening out-of-display mode determining unit 783, the out-of-range special display mode determining unit 782 is selected.

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is performed as described above. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination 712 for the second special symbol, and the acquired random number value and the determination of success / failure are obtained. Based on the table (special symbol normal time determination table 706 or special symbol probability change time determination table 708), the second special symbol determination unit 714 determines whether or not the second special symbol is correct. Then, based on the determination result of the second special symbol determination unit 714, the display mode storage unit 770 selects and determines one of the display modes, and the command transmission unit 746 A command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 610. The peripheral control board 610 that has received such a command controls display of the display mode selected and determined by the effect image display control means 616 on the effect image display device 115.

  The lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived by the first special symbol image display control means 614 to the common symbol display area 115c (see FIG. 27). The lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived by the second special symbol image display control means 615 to the common symbol display area 115c. Note that the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 are all of the tables 1 to 33 stored in the display mode storage means 770 in the common symbol display area 115c. It is derived after the decorative design 1153 is displayed in a variable manner based on one of the tables.

  There are two or more per-long display modes and a long reach off display for the display mode of the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 (hereinafter referred to as “variation of the first special symbol”) for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol. There are a mode, a short reach out display mode, a short hit display mode, a small hit display mode, and a out display mode. Each of these display modes has a plurality of patterns, all of which are stored in any of the tables 1 to 33 of the display mode storage unit 770.

  The long win display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is a big win and the big win is a long win. Tables 1 to 6 (see FIG. 45) As shown, six patterns (six types) of display modes are stored. As shown in FIG. 69, the long win display mode includes a symbol variation period and a long reach variation period.

  In the variation of the first special symbol, the variation of all the three decorative symbols 1153 is started, and the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed in this order. The symbol variation period means a period from the start of variation for all three decorative symbols 1153 to when the right symbol stops (that is, until the variation of only the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol). The long reach fluctuation period is a long reach (generally referred to as super reach) that gives the player the expectation of winning a long win when reaching reach after the end of the symbol change period. It means the time until the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Note that the number of decorative symbols 1153 is not limited to three. For example, if the number of decorative symbols 1153 is plural, the variable display of N symbols (N is 2 or more) among the plural decorative symbols 1153 is started. The symbol variation period is the period until (N-1) symbols out of N symbols are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in FIG. 69, “left” means a stop display of the left symbol, “right” means a stop display of the right symbol, and “middle” means a stop display of the middle symbol.

  The long reach off display mode is a mode in which selection is determined when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is off, and a plurality of display patterns are displayed as shown in Tables 19 to 21 (see FIG. 53). It is stored in the mode storage means 770. Each of these display patterns corresponds to the display pattern in the long win display mode. For example, in the table 1 (see FIG. 45) in which the display mode per long is selected and determined, the variation number 19 “Song reach C (via song reach A) length” is stored, and the long reach out of display mode is selected. In the determined table 19 (see FIG. 53), “song reach C (via song reach A) off” of the variation number 18 corresponding to the variation number 19 is stored. When a plurality of symbols (three symbols in this embodiment) are stopped, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner in which all of the plurality of symbols match. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain that he won per long.

  Further, the long reach out-of-range display mode is a display mode that closely resembles the corresponding long hit display mode over time. Specifically, it has a symbol variation period that is substantially the same as the long-permission display mode and a long reach variation period that is substantially the same as the long-permission display mode. Accordingly, the long reach out-of-range display mode is very similar to the long hit display mode over time. As described above, the long reach out-of-display mode is made to be a display mode that closely resembles the long win display mode over time, so that the player can draw lots by the first special symbol lottery means 700 until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that it may have been won, and to suppress the decline of interest.

  Note that “similarly over time” means that not only the variation mode displayed on the effect image display device 115 but also the temporal display mode is very similar. That is, it means that the display mode after x seconds has passed is almost the same. “Extremely similar” means that the players are similar to the extent that they cannot recognize the difference from the viewpoint of the player, and the concept includes “same”.

  The short reach out display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out, and a display mode that is very similar to a part of the long reach out display mode over time. Have. Specifically, the short reach out display mode includes a symbol variation period that is substantially the same as the symbol variation period that is a part of the long reach display mode and the long reach display mode, and a long reach variation period that is a part of the long reach display mode. And a long reach variation period that is very similar to time. Only the final stop symbol (middle symbol) that is finally stopped and displayed at a timing different from that of the other symbols among the plurality of symbols is stopped and displayed in a reach manner different from the other symbols (left symbol and right symbol).

  The out-of-display mode is a display mode that closely resembles the symbol variation period as a part of the short reach out-of-display mode. Note that at least one of the plurality of symbols (in this embodiment, the right symbol or the left symbol) is different from the other symbols and is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the reach manner.

  The short win display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined when the jackpot is won in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the winning jackpot is short hit, and is a part of the long win display mode. A symbol variation period that is very similar to the symbol variation period over time is included as part of the variation mode. Specifically, the short hit display mode has a symbol change short period and a short hit reach change period that are very similar to those of the long hit display mode over time. Since the short hit reach variation period has a shorter variation time than the long reach variation period, the variation time of the entire short hit variation mode is shorter than the variation time of the entire long hit display mode. Note that at least one of the plurality of symbols (in this embodiment, the right symbol or the left symbol) is different from the other symbols and is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the reach manner. As a result, even if the game value given to the player is won in the short win, which is smaller than the winning value in the long win, the player is not given unnecessary expectations and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The small win display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined when a big win is lost in the lottery performed by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and a small win is won, and the short hit display mode is changed over time. It is similar. Specifically, the small hit display mode has a symbol variation short period and a small hit reach variation period that are very similar to the symbol variation period of the long hit display mode over time. The small hit reach fluctuation period is very similar to the short hit reach fluctuation period over time. As a result, the entire small hit display mode closely resembles the entire short hit display mode over time. Further, since the small hit reach fluctuation period is substantially the same as the short hit reach fluctuation period, the fluctuation time is shorter than the long reach fluctuation period. Thereby, the variation time of the entire small hit variation mode is shorter than the variation time of the entire long hit display mode. Similar to the short win display mode, at least one of the multiple symbols (in this embodiment, the right symbol or the left symbol) is different from the other symbols and is stopped and displayed in a mode different from the reach mode. As a result, even if the game value given to the player is won in the short win, which is smaller than the winning value in the long win, the player is not given unnecessary expectations and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the display mode of the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “the variation of the second special symbol”) includes a special display mode per long and a special display out of long reach. There are modes, short reach off special display modes, short hit display modes, and small hit display modes. Each of these display modes has a plurality of patterns, all of which are stored in any of the tables 1 to 33 of the display mode storage unit 770.

  Here, both the short win display mode and the small hit display mode are the same display mode in the display mode in the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode in the variation of the second special symbol. The short win display mode and the small hit display mode are not necessarily the same display mode, and both modes may be similar to each other.

  The long win special display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a win, as shown in Tables 7 to 12 (see FIG. 47). The display mode is stored. In addition, the long win display mode includes a symbol change short period and a long reach change period. When a plurality of symbols (three symbols in this embodiment) are stopped, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner in which all of the plurality of symbols match. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain that he won per long.

  In the variation of the second special symbol, among the three decorative symbols 1153, the left symbol and the right symbol perform a rotation variation different from the scroll variation in the first special symbol, and the middle symbol performs a scroll variation. Then, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed almost simultaneously, and then the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The symbol variation short period is a period from the start of variation for all three decorative symbols 1153 until the left symbol and the right symbol stop (that is, until the variation of only the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol). means. This symbol variation short period is a variation in which the variation time is shorter than the symbol variation period in the variation of the first special symbol. The long reach variation period is a variation period that is very similar to the long reach variation period in the variation of the first special symbol. The effect during the long reach variation period is memorable for the player because the player has a sense of expectation that a jackpot game may occur. Thereby, a hit special display mode turns into a display mode very similar to the long hit display mode of the 1st special symbol for a player. The change time of the hit special display mode is the same as the long reach change period in the change period of the hit special display mode and the long reach change period in the long hit display mode. Since it is shorter than the time in the fluctuation period, it is shorter than the fluctuation time of the long display mode.

  The long reach off special display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is off, and there are a plurality of display patterns as shown in Tables 22 to 24 (see FIG. 56). It is stored in the display mode storage unit 770. Each of these display patterns corresponds to the display pattern in the hit special display mode. For example, in the table 7 (see FIG. 47) in which the hit special display mode is selected and determined, the variable number 82 “Song reach B (via song reach A) length” is stored, and the long reach off special display mode is stored. In the table 22 to be selected and determined, “song reach B (via song reach A)” of the variation number 81 corresponding to the variation number 82 is stored. Only the final stop symbol (middle symbol) that is finally stopped and displayed at a timing different from that of other symbols among the plurality of symbols is stopped and displayed in a reach manner different from the other symbols (left symbol and right symbol).

  Also, the long reach off special display mode consists of a display mode that closely resembles the corresponding hit special display mode over time. Specifically, the long reach off special display mode has the same symbol variation short period as the hit special display mode and the long reach change period substantially the same as the hit special display mode. Thereby, the long reach off special display mode is very similar to the hit special display mode over time. In this way, by setting the long reach off special display mode to be a display mode closely resembling the hit special display mode over time, the first special symbol lottery means 700 is used by the player until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the lottery has been won, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that “similar in time” means that not only the variation mode displayed on the effect image display device 115 but also the temporal display mode is very similar. That is, it means that the display mode after x seconds has passed is almost the same. “Extremely similar” means that the players are similar to the extent that they cannot recognize the difference from the viewpoint of the player, and the concept includes “same”.

  The short reach off special display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is off, and there are a plurality of display patterns as shown in Tables 22 to 24 (see FIG. 56). It is stored in the display mode storage unit 770. Each of these display patterns corresponds to a hit special display mode. For example, in the table 7 (see FIG. 47) in which the hit special display mode is selected and determined, the variable number 75 “per normal length” is stored, and the table 22 in which the short reach off special display mode is selected and determined (FIG. 47). 56 ”),“ normal deviation (one symbol before) ”of variation number 73 corresponding to variation number 75 and“ normal deviation (after one symbol) ”of variation number 74 are stored.

  Moreover, the short reach off special display mode has a display mode that is very similar to a part of the corresponding hit special display mode over time. Specifically, it has a symbol variation short period of the hit special display mode and a short reach variation period of the short reach off variation period of the first special symbol. In addition, the variation time of the short reach out special display mode is substantially the same as the variation time of the first special symbol out display mode. Thereby, reach can be generated without lengthening the fluctuation time. That is, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, reach is always generated if the time-shortening function is not activated. Normally, when a reach occurs, it will be longer than the fluctuation time when the reach does not occur. Therefore, when reach is generated each time the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the time is not activated, the fluctuation time becomes long, the progress of the game is slowed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, when the short reach out special display mode is displayed as the second special symbol display mode when the time is not activated, the variation time is substantially the same as the variation time of the out display mode as the first special symbol display mode. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to slow progress of the game.

  In addition, the short reach variation period of the short reach out display mode of the first special symbol and the short reach variation period of the short reach out special display mode are substantially the same over time. The variation time of the short reach variation display mode of the first special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol variation variation display mode by the time required for the short reach variation period. Therefore, the variation time of the entire short reach out special display mode is shorter than the variation time of the short reach out display mode of the first special symbol by the time required for the short reach variation period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 in the short time special display mode of the second special symbol is the variation pattern of the first special symbol in that the left symbol and the right symbol are rotationally varied. This is clearly different from the variation of the decorative pattern 1153 in the display. Therefore, in the case of the short reach off special display mode, the player can grasp that the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 starts and at the same time the variation of the second special symbol. Thereby, in the case of the out-of-display mode, the short reach-out display mode, and the long-reach out-of-display mode, it cannot be grasped that the screen is out during the fluctuation, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  That is, the occurrence of reach can also be achieved by setting the variation time in a display mode in which reach occurs (for example, short reach out-of-display mode) and the variation time in a display mode in which reach does not occur (eg, out-of-line display mode) to substantially the same time. It can suppress that the progress of the game by becomes slow. However, in such a case, in the display mode in which the reach occurs, if the reach does not occur even after the time that the reach should occur, the reach no longer occurs (that is, a big hit). It will be understood during the change, and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, in addition to the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 performed by winning the first starting opening 390, a lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 that always generates a reach at a predetermined time is provided. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that the reach will not occur during the fluctuation. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the manner of variation in the symbol variation period of the first special symbol and the manner of variation in the symbol variation short period of the second special symbol are clearly different, so that no reach will occur. It is possible to suppress remarkably during the fluctuation.

  It should be noted that the display mode related to the fluctuation when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is short hit or small hit is related to the fluctuation when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is short hit or small hit. The variation mode is the same as the display mode.

  Next, processing executed by the CPU 611 mounted on the peripheral control board 610 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing.

  As shown in FIG. 70, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control board 610 performs an initial setting process (step S310). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM 668 mounted on the peripheral control board 610 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during the initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S310) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S312).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 611 generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady treatment. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms While the progress flag T is set, the 16 ms progress flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S312 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S314), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S316).

  In the 16 ms steady process, based on the command received from the main control board 510, the effect image display device 115, the panel decoration lamp 690, and the like are controlled via the display device control board 116 and the lamp driving board 688, respectively. Executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S312 again, and each time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set (that is, every 16 ms), the above-described steps S314 and S316 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S312 (when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the CPU 611 executes the processes of steps S320 to S420. In the command analysis process in step S320, the command received from the main control board 510 is analyzed. In the effect control process in step S340, a control process related to the effect image display device 115 is executed based on the effect command related to the variation pattern received by the command receiving unit 750.

  In the sound control process in step 360, a control process related to the speakers 18 and 57 for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM or sound) is executed. In this sound control process, a process of changing the BGM according to the gaming state or the effect mode displayed on the effect image display device 115 is performed.

In the lamp control processing in step S380, control processing related to the panel decoration lamp 690 and the center decoration lamp 304 is performed. In the information output process in step S400, a command related to the variation pattern, a command related to the start winning to each start port 390, 392, 394 and other display commands are transmitted to the display device control board 116, and each lamp is turned on / off. A turn-off command is transmitted to the lamp driving board 688. In the random number update process of step S420, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S340) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S320-step S420 in a 16 ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if 16 ms or more is required from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command in step S320). Do not execute from analysis processing. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S312 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S330) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing (step S320). In the command analysis process, the CPU 611 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control board 510 (step S321). In this embodiment, when a command is received from the main control board 510, other processes such as a 16 ms steady process are interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt, and the received command is sent to the RAM 668 mounted on the peripheral control board 610. Save it in the receive command storage area. The received command storage area is stored in each area corresponding to the order in which the commands are received. Then, the contents of the reception command storage area are confirmed, and if the reception command is stored, the reception command having the reception order in the reception command storage area is read (step S322).

  It is determined whether or not the read received command is a start opening prize command (step S323), and if the read reception command is a start opening winning command (YES in step S323), it is determined whether or not it is a first start opening effective prize. (Step S324). If it is the first start opening effective winning (YES in step S324), the first starting opening effective winning flag is turned ON (step S325). Then, the command analysis process ends.

  If it is determined in step S324 that the first start opening is not valid (NO in step S324), it is determined whether or not the second / third start opening is valid (step S326). If there is (YES in step S326), the second and third starting opening valid winning flags are turned ON (step S327). Then, the command analysis process ends.

  The first starting opening valid winning is a command indicating that the starting opening winning command (see step S323) received from the main control board 510 has won the first starting opening 390, and the first special symbol is reserved. This means that the reserved number of the first special symbol stored by the number storage means 628 (see FIG. 29) is added. That is, when a game ball is received at the first starting port 390, the command receiving means 750 determines whether or not the command receiving means 750 has been counted by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (that is, the count number by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is the first count). Regardless of whether or not the predetermined number (4 in this embodiment) has been reached, the game ball has been received at the first start port 390 transmitted from the main control board 510 (command transmission means 746) (winned) Command) is received. At this time, if the number of first special symbol reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage means 628 is less than the first predetermined number, the first special symbol reservation number storage means 628 stores the first number. 1 is added to the number of reserved special symbols, and the first start opening is awarded. On the other hand, if the number of first special symbol reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage means 628 reaches the first predetermined number, the first special symbol reservation number storage means 628 stores the first number. The number of special symbols held is maintained (that is, not added). At this time, even if a command indicating that the game ball has been received at the first start opening 390 is received, the first start opening is not valid. In this way, the peripheral control board 610 (command receiving means 750) receives a command indicating that a game ball has won a prize at the first start opening 390 regardless of whether or not the first start opening is a valid winning. When the number of reserved special symbols stored in the first special symbol reserved number storage means 628 is less than the first predetermined number (that is, when 1 is added), the first start opening effective winning is achieved. When the number of reserved special symbols stored in the special symbol reserved number storage means 628 reaches the first predetermined number (that is, if it is not added), no effective winning is achieved. Further, the counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the hold number by the first special symbol hold number storage means 628 are the same value.

  Similarly, the second and third start opening effective winnings are the same as the first starting opening effective winnings, when the start opening winning command received from the main control board 510 (see step S323) is the second start opening 392 or the third start opening winning 392. This is a command indicating that a winning has been made at the start port 394, and means that the number of second special symbol reservations stored by the second special symbol reservation number storage means 630 (see FIG. 29) is added. That is, when a game ball is received at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the command receiving means 750 determines whether or not the command receiving means 750 has been counted by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (that is, the second special symbol hold counter 713). The second start port 392 or the third start port transmitted from the main control board 510 (command transmission means 746) regardless of whether the count number by the second control number reaches the second predetermined number (4 in this embodiment) or not. At 394, a command indicating that the game ball has been accepted (winned) is received. At this time, if the number of second special symbol reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage means 630 is less than the second predetermined number, the second special symbol reservation number storage means 630 stores the second special symbol reservation number storage means 630. 1 is added to the number of reserved special symbols, and a second start opening effective winning is obtained. On the other hand, if the number of second special symbol reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage means 630 reaches the second predetermined number, the second special symbol reservation number storage means 630 stores the second number. Maintain the number of reserved special symbols (ie, do not add). At this time, even if a command indicating that the game ball has been received by the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is received, the second start port effective winning is not achieved. As described above, the peripheral control board 610 (command receiving means 750) indicates that the game ball has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 regardless of whether or not the second start port is effective. Receive the indicated command. Then, if the number of reserved special symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage means 630 is less than the second predetermined number (that is, when 1 is added), the second start opening effective winning is achieved, and the second When the number of reserved special symbols stored in the special symbol holding number storage means 630 reaches the second predetermined number (that is, if it is not added), no effective winning is achieved. Further, the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 and the hold number by the second special symbol hold number storage means 630 are the same value.

  In step S323, if the received command is not a start opening prize command (NO in step S323), it is determined whether or not the command received in step S321 is an effect command (step S328). If the command received in step S321 is an effect command (YES in step S328), the fluctuation pattern reception flag is turned on (step S329), and the command analysis process is terminated. On the other hand, if the command received in step S321 is not an effect command (NO in step S328), the flag corresponding to the received command is turned ON (step S330), and the command analysis process is terminated.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S340). In the effect control process, the CPU 611 executes processes in steps S342 to S348.

  In the first, second, and third start opening effective winning memory processing of step S342, the first special symbol holding number is stored based on the presence or absence of the effective winning at the first starting opening 390, and the second start opening 392 or the second start opening 392 is stored. Based on the presence / absence of an effective winning at the 3 start opening 394, the second special symbol holding number is stored, and an effect process related to the 2nd and 3rd starting opening effective winning is executed. Details will be described later.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process in step S344, setting for starting the decorative symbol variation display is performed if an effect command is received. Specifically, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol and the stop symbol are determined according to the effect command. Details will be described later.

  In the decorative symbol variation stop process in step S346, when a variation confirmation command is received from the main control board 510, a display command is transmitted to the display device control substrate 116 to confirm the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect image display device 115. Take control.

  In the jackpot display process of step S348, in response to the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 510, a display indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state or a display in the jackpot gaming state (for example, round display or the like) on the effect image display device 115. ) Is controlled.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third starting opening valid winning memory processing (step S342). In the first, second, and third starting opening valid winning storage processing of FIG. 74, the CPU 611 first determines whether or not the first starting opening effective winning flag is ON (step S3421). That is, in step S325, if the first start opening effective winning flag is ON, it is determined that the first starting opening effective winning flag is ON. If the first start opening valid winning flag is ON (YES in step S3421), the first special symbol hold number is incremented by one (step S3422), and the first special symbol hold number display command, that is, the first special symbol is displayed. The number of holds of the first special symbol stored in the number-of-holds storage unit 628 (see FIG. 29) is set (step S3423). Then, the first start port effective winning flag is turned OFF (step S3424).

  After turning off the first start opening effective winning flag in step S3424 or if the first starting opening effective winning flag is OFF in step S3421 (OFF in step S3421), then the second and third starting openings It is determined whether or not the winning flag is ON (step S3425). That is, in step S327, if the second and third start opening effective winning flags are ON, it is determined that the second and third starting opening effective winning flags are ON. If the second and third starting opening valid winning flags are ON (YES in step S3425), the second special symbol reservation number is incremented by one (step S3426), and the second special symbol reservation number display command, ie, the first 2 The number of reserved special symbols stored in the special symbol holding number storage means 630 (see FIG. 29) is set (step S3427). Then, after performing the second and third starting port effective winning effect processing (step S3428), the second and third starting port effective winning flags are turned OFF (step S3429), and the first, second and third starting operations are performed. The mouth valid winning memory process is terminated. In step S3425, the first, second, and third start-port effective winning storage processes are also ended when the second / third start-port effective winning flag is OFF (NO in step S3425).

  Here, the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing in step S3428 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing.

  In the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (step S34281). If the current gaming state is not the short-time gaming state (YES in step S34281), it is determined whether or not the production point P is less than the upper limit of 10 points (step S34282). At this time, if the effect point P is less than 10 points (YES in step S34282), one point is further stored in the current effect point P (that is, one point is added or accumulated) (step S34283), The display of the production point P is set (step S34284). In the present embodiment, the gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state corresponds to a normal gaming state and a gaming state in which only the probability changing function is activated and the short-time function is not activated (for example, a gaming state after the end of the short game).

  By the way, as described above, in the gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting port 390 than the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394, while in the short-time gaming state, It becomes easier for the game ball to win the third start port 394 than the first start port 390. If the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the effect point P is not stored even if a game ball wins the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394 (NO in step S34281). . This is a privilege for winning at a starting opening where it is difficult for a game ball to win as will be described later, if the stage point P is to be given until winning at the second starting opening 392 and the third starting opening 394 in such a short gaming state. This is because the meaning of the production point P is lost.

  The production point P is a point stored in response to the winning of a game ball at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. In the present embodiment, 1 point is stored each time one game ball wins in the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. That is, the production point P is a quantitative representation of the expected value for displaying the special production. In other words, every time a game ball wins in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the effect point P is incremented by one, and the effect point P after storage is a predetermined upper limit value (this implementation) In the form, it is possible to store up to 10 points).

  Here, the special effect is composed of a special first effect and a special second effect, and corresponds to the special effect game mode in the present invention. The special first effect is an effect that is displayed on the effect image display device 115 when the effect point P reaches 10 points, and the special second effect is the basis for storing 10 points of the effect points P ( In other words, it is an effect that is displayed at the timing when the variation display of the second and third start opening effective winnings is performed (the trigger point P after storage reaches 10 points). In other words, the special second effect is special at the timing when the variation pattern based on the second and third start opening effective winnings is displayed when the effect point P becomes 10 points due to the second and third starting opening effective winnings. This is to produce a production. Therefore, when the second and third start opening valid winnings are made, the number of holds by the first special symbol reservation number storage means 628 or the second special symbol reservation number storage means 630 is 1 or more and the production point P is 10 points. The special first effect is displayed immediately when the effect point P reaches 10 points, while the special second effect is held when the second and third start opening valid winnings are made. It is displayed after the change display that has been done ends. As a result, when the effect command received in step S3201 is stored in the received command storage area at the time when 10 effect points P are stored, it is received earlier. While the variable display related to the effect command is being performed, the special first effect is continuously performed.

  After setting the display of the production point P in step S34284, it is determined whether or not 10 production points P have been stored (step S34285). Here, if 10 points of effect points P are stored (YES in step S34285), the second special symbol hold number is set in the effect hold counter (step S34286), and the special first effect flag is turned ON (step S34286). Step S34287), the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing is terminated.

  In step S34286, the second special symbol holding number is set in the production hold counter when the second and third starting opening effective winnings are displayed in a variable manner based on which 10 production points P are stored. This is to perform the special second effect.

  Further, when it is determined in step S34281 that the game is in the short-time gaming state (NO in step S34281), when it is determined in step S34282 that the effect point P is 10 (NO in step S34282), the effect point P in step S34285. When it is determined that the value is not 10 (NO in step S34285), the second and third starting opening effective winning effect processing is ended.

[Decoration pattern change start processing]
Next, a decorative symbol variation start process and a process executed in the process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S344). FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing in the decorative symbol variation start processing. In the present embodiment, processing for setting an almighty symbol (A symbol) as a part of the decorative symbol 1153 is performed based on a variation pattern that stops and displays the chance eye. Here, setting the almighty symbol (A symbol) means replacing a part of the decorative symbol 1153 with the almighty symbol (A symbol). Processing related to this almighty symbol (A symbol) is A mode setting processing. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a small hitting A symbol usage count setting process in the variation pattern determination and A mode setting process. FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the A symbol usage count setting process per 2R in the variation pattern determination and A mode setting process. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the A symbol usage count setting process per 15R in the variation pattern determination and A mode setting process. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of A symbol consumption processing in variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the chance A symbol consumption process. 83 and 84 are diagrams showing an example of a table for determining the number of symbols A set when the chance eye is stopped. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a table for determining the consumption number (restoration number) of the A symbol. FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the setting of the almighty symbol (A symbol) for a part of the decorative symbol 1153.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of the special effect lottery process in the decorative symbol variation start process. FIG. 88 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the effect point storage process. In the present embodiment, in addition to an aspect (see step S34283 in FIG. 75) in which one effect point P is added in response to the fact that the second and third start opening effective winning flags are ON, also in the decorative symbol variation start process Production points P may be added.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process of FIG. 86, the CPU 611 first determines whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is ON (step S3441). If the variation pattern reception flag is ON (YES in step S3441), it is determined whether or not the short-time gaming state is set (step S3442).

  If it is determined in step S3442 that the game is not in the short-time gaming state (YES in step S3442), a special effect lottery process is performed (step S3443), and it is determined whether or not the variation pattern related to the effect command received in step S321 is a winning variation pattern. It is determined (step S3444).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3442 that the game is in the short-time gaming state (NO in step S3442), the special effect lottery process is omitted and the process proceeds to step S3444. Details of the special effect lottery process will be described later. As described above, during the short-time gaming state, even if a game ball wins at the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394, the effect point P is not stored, so in step S3442, if the short-time gaming state is present, A special effect lottery process for performing various effects related to the effect point P is omitted. In addition, during the short-time gaming state, not only the effect points P are not stored, but also the storage status of the effect points P is not displayed. Thereby, even if a game ball wins the 2nd starting port 392, the fall of the interest by not having the production point P stored can be suppressed.

If it is determined in step S3444 that the pattern is a winning variation pattern (YES in step S3444), a corresponding winning stop symbol determination process is performed (step S3445). In this stop symbol determination process, if it is a long hit, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is set. If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the stop symbol for the probability variation symbol is determined with a predetermined probability, and the probability variation is determined. If the jackpot flag is not set, the stop symbol for the non-probable variable symbol is always determined. If it is a short hit or a small hit, the stop symbol for short hit / small hit is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is a deviation (NO in step S3444), a stop symbol of the deviation symbol is determined (step S3446).

  When the stop symbol is determined in step S3445 or step S3446, variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing are executed (step S3447). This variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing will be described later. Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern reception flag is turned OFF (step S3448). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the production hold counter is 0 (step S3449). If the production hold counter is not 0 (YES in step S3449), the fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display started from now) is the first. 2. It is determined whether or not the variation is based on the third start opening effective winning (step S3450).

  In step S3450, if the change display to be started is a change based on the second and third start opening effective winnings (YES in step S3450), one is subtracted from the effect suspension counter (step S3451), and the decorative symbol change is made. End the start process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3449 that the production hold counter is 0 (NO in step S3449), and when it is determined in step S3450 that the variation is based on the first start opening effective winning (step S3450). NO in
Finishes the decorative symbol variation start process without performing the subtraction process (step S3451) of the effect suspension counter.

  If the variation pattern reception flag is OFF in step S3441 (NO in step S3441), the decorative symbol variation start process is terminated as it is.

[Variation pattern determination and A mode setting process]
In the variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing of FIG. 77, first, the CPU 611 determines whether or not it is not time-saving (step S34471). If it is not non-time saving, that is, if it is not a time saving gaming state (YES in step S34471), the process proceeds to step S34472. On the other hand, if the time is short, that is, if it is a time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S34479.

  If it is determined that the time is short, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a small hit chance (step S34472). This determination processing is to determine whether or not the variation pattern is the chance number (small hit) of the variation number 44. If it is determined that the variation pattern is the small hit chance (YES in step S34472), the small hit hour A symbol usage number setting process is executed (step S34473), and the process proceeds to step S34479. The small hitting A symbol usage number setting process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the small hit chance (NO in step S34472), the process advances to step S34474.

  In step S34474, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a chance per 2R (step S34474). This determination processing is to determine whether or not the variation pattern is the chance number (short hit) of the variation number 43. If it is determined that the variation pattern is the 2nd chance per 2R (YES in step S34474), the A symbol usage number setting process per 2R is executed (step S34475), and the process proceeds to step S34479. The process for setting the number of A symbols used per 2R will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the 2R chance (NO in step S34474), the process proceeds to step S34476.

  In step S34476, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a chance per 15R (step S34476). This determination processing is to determine whether or not the variation pattern is the chance number (per probability variation length) of the variation number 45. Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is the 15th chance per 15R (YES in step S34476), the hour A symbol usage number setting process is executed per 15R (step S34477), and the process proceeds to step S34479. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the chance per 15R (NO in step S34476), the A symbol consumption process is executed (step S34478), and the process proceeds to step S34479. The A symbol usage count setting process and the A symbol consumption process per 15R will be described later.

  In step S34479, the received variation pattern is set. Thereafter, the variation pattern determination and the A mode setting process are terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a chance-like variation pattern has been received (steps S34472, S34474, and S34476). A setting process is performed.

  As described above, the “song” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol column 1153c, and only the middle symbol column 1153b scrolls in the vertical direction. It is a reach fluctuation that may be won per small hit or probable length (see FIG. 67 (G)). Then, when the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, occurrence of a short hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, or a long hit gaming state is determined (see FIG. 67 (H)).

  In the present embodiment, after the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and a part of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c is an almighty symbol (A It is replaced with (design). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the decorative design 1153 is composed of numeric symbols “1” to “8” and a pattern corresponding to the numeric symbol. Each of the numerical patterns “1” to “5” corresponds to a picture composed of a diva character image, etc., and each of the numerical patterns “6” to “8” corresponds to “song”, “princess”, “legend”. "Corresponds to a picture composed of a character image or the like. The aspect ratio of the pattern to the numerical design is about 2.7 times, and the area ratio of the pattern to the numerical design is about 7 times. In the present embodiment, some of the “Song”, “Princess”, and “Legend” designs corresponding to the number designs “6” to “8” are replaced with the design “A” composed of character images and the like. Thus, a part of the decorative design 1153 is replaced with the almighty design (A design). Thereby, even if it is an almighty symbol (A symbol), it will have the same number symbol as an original symbol, and the order of the symbol row | line containing an almighty symbol (A symbol) can be grasped | ascertained. As a result, it becomes easier to predict the formation of the reach mode in the low-speed scroll fluctuation performed in the stop display. In addition, since the picture is larger than the number design, the replacement with the almighty design (A design) becomes easy to understand. As a result, the variable display using the almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes highly interesting. In the present embodiment, only the design is replaced. However, if the numerical information indicated by the numerical design is not changed, for example, the replacement of the numerical design that changes the appearance may be performed.

  Then, in a change after a part of the decorative symbol 1153 is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol), either the stop symbol of the left symbol column 1153a or the stop symbol of the right symbol column 1153c is the almighty symbol (A symbol). In such a case, control is always performed so that the reach mode is generated. Further, when both the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are almighty symbols (A symbol), control is performed so that long hits are always generated. Therefore, the greater the number of decorative symbols 1153 replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol), the greater the player's expectation for reach or win, and the lowering of interest can be suppressed. When the occurrence of the gaming state per probability variation length is confirmed, the stop symbol in the variable display from which the replacement to the almighty symbol (A symbol) is derived is a predetermined probability variable jackpot symbol ("1" in this embodiment). , “1”, “1”).

  It is the A symbol usage number setting process that sets the quantity of the decorative symbol 1153 to be replaced with this almighty symbol (A symbol). In the present embodiment, up to six of the decorative symbols 1153 (specifically, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c) are replaced with almighty symbols (A symbol).

  Here, the A symbol usage number setting process will be described. As described above, the A symbol usage number setting process includes the small hitting time A symbol usage number setting process of FIG. 78, the 2R hourly A symbol usage number setting process of FIG. Use number setting processing is included.

[A symbol use count setting process for small hits]
In the small hitting time A symbol usage number setting process of FIG. 78, the CPU 611 first executes a chance A symbol consumption process (step S344731). This chance A symbol consumption process will be described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the state is a low probability state (step S344732). The low probability state means that it is not a probability variation gaming state (non-notification probability variation gaming state). If it is determined that the state is a low probability state (YES in step S344473), a lottery is performed from the low probability → small hitting table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344733), and the number of A symbols is set ( Step S344735). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the low probability state (NO in step S344732), that is, if it is the probability variation gaming state (non-notification probability variation gaming state), high probability → small hitting time based on the remaining number of A symbols A lottery is performed from the table (step S344734), and the number of A symbols is set (step S344735). When the number of A symbols is set, the small hitting A symbol number setting process is terminated. An example of the low probability → small hitting time table is shown in FIG. FIG. 83 (b) shows an example of the high probability → small hitting time table.

[A symbol usage count setting process per 2R]
In the hour A symbol usage count setting process per 2R in FIG. 79, the CPU 611 first executes a chance A symbol consumption process (step S34451). This chance A symbol consumption process will be described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (step S344752). If it is determined that the state is in a low probability state (YES in step S344752), a lottery is performed from the low probability → 2R per hour table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344753), and the number of A symbols is set ( Step S344755). On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is not low probability (NO in step S344475), a lottery is performed from the high probability → 2R per hour table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344754), and the number of A symbols is set (step S34475). S344755). When the number of A symbols is set, the A symbol number setting process is ended per 2R. An example of the low probability → 2R per hour table is shown in FIG. 83 (c). An example of the high probability → 2R per hour table is shown in FIG.

[A symbol usage count setting process per 15R]
In the hour A symbol usage number setting process per 15R in FIG. 80, the CPU 611 first executes a chance A symbol consumption process (step S344747). This chance A symbol consumption process will be described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (step S344772). If it is determined that the state is a low probability state (YES in step S344747), a lottery is performed from the low probability → 15R per hour table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344773), and the number of A symbols is set ( Step S344775). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not a low probability state (NO in step S344472), a lottery is performed from the high probability → 15R per hour table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344774), and the number of A symbols is set (step S34477). S344775). When the number of A symbols is set, the hour A symbol number setting process is terminated per 15R. An example of the low probability → 15R per hour table is shown in FIG. An example of the high probability → 15R per hour table is shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is set by executing the A symbol usage number setting process (see FIGS. 78 to 80). Here, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is determined with reference to the tables (FIGS. 83 and 84) based on the gaming state. In these tables, the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is generally increased when the gaming state is advantageous to the player. Therefore, by setting the number of almighty symbols (A symbol), for example, an expectation for a probable game state (short hit) can be given, which contributes to the suppression of the decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the A symbol usage number setting process, the predetermined decorative symbol 1153 is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol) by the number set in the table. That is, in the replacement to the almighty design (A design), the replacement is performed by determining only the set number. Thereby, the replacement of the almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes relatively simple, and the processing load is reduced. Also, since the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is not uniform, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is determined with reference to the table (see FIGS. 83 and 84), the determination process of the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is relatively easy. As a result, it becomes relatively easy to distribute the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) according to the gaming state and the like.

  Furthermore, in the A symbol usage number setting process, as described above, the small symbol hitting time A symbol usage number setting process in FIG. 78, the 2 A symbolic hour A symbol usage number setting process in FIG. 79, and the 15 symbol R in FIG. Time A symbol usage number setting processing is included. Then, in each process, it is determined whether or not the state is a low probability state, and a table is selected. Specifically, in the small hitting time A symbol usage number setting process, if it is determined that the state is a low probability state (YES in step S344732), a lottery is selected from the low probability → small hitting time table (see FIG. 83 (a)). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the low probability state (NO in step S344732), a lottery is performed from the high probability → small hitting time table (see FIG. 83 (b)) (step S344734). In addition, in the time A symbol usage count setting process per 2R, if it is determined that the state is in a low probability state (YES in step S344752), a lottery is performed from the low probability → attack probability time table (see FIG. 83 (c)) ( On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not in the low probability state (NO in step S344475), a lottery is performed from the high probability → 2R per hour table (see FIG. 83 (d)) (step S344754). Furthermore, in the per-R 15R hour A symbol usage count setting process, if it is determined that the state is in a low probability state (YES in step S344472), a lottery is performed from the low probability → 15R per hour table (see FIG. 84A). On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is not the low probability state (NO in Step S344472), the lottery is performed from the high probability → 15R per hour table (see FIG. 84B). Thereby, the game state can be estimated to some extent from the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol). As a result, the substitution to the almighty symbol (A symbol) itself is highly interesting, and the player can be expected to expect a big hit game.

  Further, as described above, the “song” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row 1153c, and only the middle symbol row 1153b scrolls in the vertical direction is short. This is the reach fluctuation that may be won per hit, small hit or probable length (see FIG. 67 (G)). Then, when the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, occurrence of a short hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, or a long hit gaming state is determined (see FIG. 67 (H)). Then, after the “Legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and a part of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol). Is done. In this way, the replacement to the almighty symbol (A symbol) is performed with the execution confirmation of the short hit game and the execution confirmation of the small hit game as a trigger. That is, there is a case where replacement to an almighty symbol (A symbol) is performed in response to a transition from a low probability state to a high probability state. Therefore, for the player, the replacement to the almighty symbol (A symbol) and the variable display using the almighty symbol (A symbol) become interesting, and it can be reliably prevented that the variable symbol display becomes monotonous. .

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 77, when the execution of the small hit game is confirmed, that is, when the variation pattern is the small hit chance (YES in step S34472), the small hit hour A symbol usage number setting process is performed. It is executed (step S34473). On the other hand, when the execution of the short hit game is confirmed, that is, when the variation pattern is the second chance per 2R (YES in step S34474), the A symbol usage number setting process per 2R is executed (step S34475). The number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is determined depending on which process is executed. As a result, it is possible to infer whether or not it is an advantageous state (high probability state due to short hits), and the player feels “hot” even by the replacement effect to the almighty symbol (A symbol) Is possible.

  For example, in the A symbol usage number setting process, looking at the table that is referred to in the low probability state, the remaining probability of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is low in the low probability → small hit time table of FIG. When “0”, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is not set to “6”. On the other hand, in the low probability → accuracy table of FIG. 83 (c), when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “0”, the almighty symbol (A symbol) has a probability of 5/100. The number of settings is “6”. As a result, when 6 almighty symbols (A symbol) are set in the low probability state where the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “0”, it is determined from the effect mode that the short hit (per 2R) is established. To do. Thereby, the gaming state (high probability state) can be determined based on the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) set, and a sense of superiority can be given to the player. And since the execution confirmation of the short hit game can be quickly grasped, the game can be enjoyed with a sense of security.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, when execution of the game per long is confirmed, that is, when the variation pattern is the chance per 15R (YES in step S34476), the A symbol usage number setting process per 15R Is executed (step S34477). As a result, the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is determined according to the execution confirmation of the long hit game, so the probability variation per length is suddenly derived from the same effects as the short hit game or the small hit game. become. As a result, the player can be delighted. In addition, if the selection probability of the set number is made different from the short hit game or the small hit game, it becomes possible to infer whether or not it is an advantageous state (determined state of the long hit game) When replacing the almighty symbol (A symbol), it is possible to generate a sense of expectation for the jackpot that "Is it already hit?"

  For example, among the tables in FIG. 83 and FIG. 84, when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “4” only in the low probability → 15R hour table shown in FIG. With the probability, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “5”. As a result, when five almighty symbols (A symbol) are set in a low probability state where the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “4”, it is per probability variation length (per 15R). Determine. Thereby, the execution decision of the long hit game can be quickly grasped by the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) set, and the game can be enjoyed with a sense of superiority and a sense of security.

[A symbol consumption processing]
In the A symbol consumption process of FIG. 81, the CPU 611 first determines whether or not the number of A symbols is 0 (step S344781). This number of A symbols is the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbols) set previously. If it is determined that the number of A symbols is 0 (YES in step S344781), the A symbol used number allocation table A (see FIG. 85) is selected (step S344787), and the process proceeds to step S344791. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of A symbols is not 0 (NO in step S344781), the process proceeds to step S344783.

  In step S344783, it is determined whether or not the number of A symbols is 1. Here, when it is determined that the number of symbols A is 1 (YES in step S344783), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (non-notification probability variation game state) (step S344784). If YES (YES in step S344784), the A symbol used number allocation table C (see FIG. 85) is selected (step S344785), and the process proceeds to step S3444471. If it is not in the high probability state (NO in step S344784), the A symbol used number allocation table B (see FIG. 85) is selected (step S344786), and the process proceeds to step S344791.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S344478 that the number of A symbols is not 1 (NO in step S34483, that is, if the number of A symbols is 2 or more), it is determined whether or not the number of A symbols is 2 (step S34483). S344787). If it is determined that the number of symbols A is 2 (YES in step S344787), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (non-notification probability variation game state) (step S344788). If YES (YES in step S344788), the A symbol used number allocation table D (see FIG. 85) is selected (step S344789), and the process proceeds to step S344791. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of A symbols is not 2 (NO in step S344787, that is, if the number of A symbols is 3 or more) or if it is determined that the state is not in a high probability state (NO in step S344788), use of A symbol The number distribution table E (see FIG. 85) is selected (step S344790), and the process proceeds to step S344791.

  In step S34491, based on the variation pattern, each of the A symbol used number allocation tables (that is, among the A symbol used number allocation tables A to E, any one of the above-described step S34482, step S344785, step S344786, step S344789, step S344790) The number of use of A symbol (consumption number) is selected by lottery. Next, the number of A symbols used is set (step S344792), the number of A symbols used is subtracted from the number of A symbols, and the number of A symbols is updated (step S344793). And A symbol consumption processing is complete | finished.

[A symbol consumption process at chance]
In the chance A symbol consumption process of FIG. 82, the CPU 611 first determines whether or not the number of A symbols (remaining number) is 0 (step S344731). If it is determined that the number of A symbols is 0 (YES in step S344731), the number of A symbol used (consumption number) is set to 0 (step S344731), and the process proceeds to step S3447316. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of A symbols is not 0 (NO in step S344731), the process proceeds to step S3447313.

  In step S3447313, it is determined whether the number of A symbols (remaining number) is any of 1 to 3. If it is determined that the number of A symbols is any one of 1 to 3 (YES in step S3447313), the number of A symbol used (consumption number) is set to 1 (step S3447314), and the process proceeds to step S3447316. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of A symbols is not any of 1 to 3 (NO in step S3447313), that is, when the number of A symbols is any of 4 to 6, the number of used A symbols (consumption number). Is set to 2 (step S3447315), and the process proceeds to step S3447316.

  In step S3447316, the number of A symbols is subtracted from the number of A symbols and the number of A symbols is updated. And A symbol consumption processing is complete | finished.

  As described above, in the A symbol consumption process, the number of A symbols used (consumption number) is drawn out based on the variation pattern (step S344791). Here, the number of consumption of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined with reference to the table (see FIG. 85) based on the gaming state. Then, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is replaced with the original decorative symbol 1153 for the determined number of consumptions. In other words, when the almighty symbol (A symbol) is consumed, the replacement is performed by determining only the consumption number. Thereby, the process which concerns on consumption of an almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes comparatively easy. In addition, since the number of consumption of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is not uniform, the variable display itself using the almighty symbol (A symbol) is highly interesting. Furthermore, since the number of consumptions of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined using the table (see FIG. 85), the process for determining the consumption number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes relatively easy, depending on the gaming state, etc. The distribution of the number of consumptions of the almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes relatively simple.

  In the A symbol consumption process, the number of A symbols used (consumption number) is drawn out based on the variation pattern (step S344791). Specifically, the consumption number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined corresponding to the variation pattern commands of the variation numbers 8 to 15, 27, 28, 34, 35, 41, and 42 (see FIG. 85). Thereby, an almighty design (A design) can be used (consumed) according to a game, and the variable display using an almighty design (A design) becomes a highly interesting thing.

  Furthermore, in the A symbol consumption process, when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “0” (step S344781), “1” (step S34483), “2” or more (step S344787), In other words, the number of consumption of almighty symbols (A symbols) is determined. Specifically, the A symbol used number allocation tables A to E to be referred to are determined by this case classification (step S344478, step S344785, step S344786, step S344789, step S344790). As a result, the almighty design (A design) is appropriately consumed in the variable display using the almighty design (A design), and the interest of the variable display using the almighty design (A design) is not reduced. .

  When the remaining number is “1” or more, in the A symbol consumption process, it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (steps S344784 and S344788), and the consumption number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined. Yes. Specifically, when it is in a high probability state (YES in step S344784, YES in step S344788), reference is made to the A symbol use number distribution tables C and D, whereas when it is not in a high probability state (NO in step S344784). In step S344788, NO), reference is made to the A symbol used number distribution tables B and E. This makes it possible to estimate the gaming state to some extent from the number of consumption of the almighty symbol (A symbol), and the variable display itself using the almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes highly interesting.

  Furthermore, in the A symbol consumption process, when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “1” and in a high probability state (YES in step S34483, YES in step S344784), A symbol usage number allocation table C is selected (step S344785). In the A symbol use number distribution table C, as shown in FIG. 85, the consumption number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is always allocated to “0” for the variation pattern of “out”. Thereby, in the case of a high probability state, the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbols) does not become “0”. Therefore, while the almighty symbol (A symbol) remains, there is a possibility of a high probability state, and the player's expectation can be reliably maintained.

[Setting and consumption mode of almighty design (A design)]
In the present embodiment, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is set in a manner as shown in FIG. That is, the “song” symbol, “princess” symbol and “legend” symbol in the left symbol row 1153a shown in FIG. 86 (a), and the “song” symbol, “princess” symbol and “legend” symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are almighty. It is a symbol that may be replaced with a symbol (A symbol). Specifically, when the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 1, the “song” symbol in the left symbol row 1153a is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol) (see FIG. 86 (b)). When the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 2, the “song” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a and the “song” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c are replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol) (FIG. 86). (See (c)). Similarly, if the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 3, the “Princess” symbol in the left symbol row is further. If the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 4, the “princess” in the right symbol row 1153c is further increased. If the number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is 5, the “legend” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a is six, and if the number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is six, the right symbol column 1153c The “legend” symbol is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol) (see FIGS. 86D to 86G).

  When the almighty symbol (A symbol) is stopped and displayed, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is returned to the original symbol. This is the consumption of the almighty symbol (A symbol). The consumption order of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is basically as shown below. For example, when six almighty symbols (A symbol) are set (see FIG. 86 (g)), the “A (8)” symbol in the right symbol row 1153c is first stopped and displayed in the original “legend”. Returning to the design (see FIG. 86 (f)). Next, the symbol “A (8)” in the left symbol row 1153a is stopped and displayed, and the original symbol is restored (see FIG. 85 (e)). Similarly, “A (7)” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c → “A (7)” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → “A (6)” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c → “A (” in the left symbol column 1153a 6) The almighty symbol (A symbol) is consumed in the order of the symbol. As described above, the number of consumption of almighty symbols (A symbols) is determined by the table shown in FIG. That is, one or two almighty symbols (A symbols) are consumed in the order shown here by lottery by the table selected from A to E. In addition, there is a possibility that two almighty symbols (A symbol) may be consumed in this order based on the variation pattern per length of variation numbers 10, 13, 15, 28, 35, 42. Yes (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, an almighty symbol (A symbol) may be consumed separately from the above order. This is the case based on the variation pattern of the chance numbers of the variation numbers 43, 44, and 45. The process in this case is the chance A symbol consumption process. According to the chance pattern, the “song” symbol is first displayed in the left symbol column 1153a, and the “princess” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol column 1153c. Therefore, when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 4 or more (see FIGS. 86 (e) to (f)), the “A (6)” symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c The “A (7)” symbol is consumed. In the case of the chance pattern variation pattern, even if the almighty symbol (A symbol) is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c, the consumption process is executed when each almighty symbol (A symbol) is stopped. Thus, the reach mode is not formed, and the above-described game per probability variation length is not executed.

  Therefore, in the chance A symbol consumption process, if the number of A symbols is not 0 to 3 (NO in step S3447311, NO in step S3447313), that is, if the number of A symbols is 4 to 6, the number of A symbols used is 2 (Step S3447315). When the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 1 to 3 (see FIGS. 86 (b) to (d)), the symbol “A (6)” in the left symbol row 1153a is consumed. Therefore, in the chance A symbol consumption process, if the number of A symbols is 1 to 3 (NO in step S3447311, YES in step S3447313), that is, if the number of A symbols is 1 to 3, the number of A symbols used is 1 (step S3447315). In this case, the “A” symbol changes to the original symbol when stopped, and the function of the almighty symbol (A symbol) that forms the reach mode is not exhibited.

  From the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) consumed (maximum of two) due to such a chance pattern variation pattern, the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) in FIG. 83 and FIG. The number is 4 at the maximum.

[Special production lottery processing]
In the special effect lottery process of FIG. 87, the CPU 611 first determines whether or not the effect hold counter is 1 (step S34431). Here, if it is determined that the production hold counter is not 1 (YES in step S34431), whether or not the production point is greater than 6 points and less than 10 points, that is, 7 points or more and 9 points or less. It is determined whether or not (step S34432). If the production hold counter is greater than 1, the production points are 10 points. If the production hold counter is 0, the production points are less than 10.

  If it is determined in step S34432 that the effect point P is greater than 6 points and less than 10 points (YES in step S34432), it is determined whether or not a special effect condition is satisfied (step S34433). On the other hand, when the production point P is within the range of 0 to 6 points (including 0 points and 6 points) or 10 points (NO in step S34432), the special production conditions are satisfied. The special effect lottery process is terminated without determining whether or not there is. That is, if the production point reaches 10 points, the second special symbol hold counter 713 that triggered the 10 points is counted (second special symbol hold by the second special symbol hold number storage means 630). In the variable display performed before the variable display based on the special effect lottery process is terminated without determining whether or not the special effect condition is satisfied. As a result, the special effect in the variable display based on the count by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (holding the second special symbol by the second special symbol hold number storage means 630) that triggered the 10 points is wasted. Therefore, it is possible to continue to give the player a sense of expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

  Note that the special effect condition is that the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern, and the effect point P storage performed in response to the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern. Winning a lottery. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a long hit, or when it is out of reach, the effect point P storage lottery is performed. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88, in the case of variation numbers 11 to 21, 25 to 28, 32 to 35, 39 to 42, and 76 to 86, the effect point P storage lottery is performed. At this time, the probability of winning the effect point P storage lottery is set to, for example, one half as shown in FIG.

  In this way, the effect point is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold (7 points in the present embodiment) and the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern (that is, the first special symbol image display control means 614 or the second When the special symbol image display control means 615 is a specific fluctuation pattern, the special effect condition is established selectively (that is, when the effect point P storage lottery is won). Therefore, the production points are stored based on the winning of the game ball at the second start opening 392, and the special production conditions are established and the production points are 10 points rather than the accumulated production points reaching 10 points. Less frequently.

  When the special effect condition is satisfied in step S34433 (YES in step S34433), effect point P storage processing is performed (step S34444).

  In the effect point P storage process (step S34444), the storage process is performed so that the effect point P after the storage becomes the upper limit of 10 points. That is, if the production point P before storage is 7 points, 3 points are stored, if the production point P before storage is 8 points, 2 points are stored, and if the production point P before storage is 9 points, 1 point is stored. Stored. In other words, when the above-mentioned special effect condition is satisfied, the quantity necessary for the effect point P to reach a predetermined upper limit (10 points in the present embodiment) is added, and the effect point P after storage is the predetermined value. Increase to the upper limit of.

  Then, after the effect point storage process (step S34444) is performed, the special first effect flag and the special second effect flag are turned ON (step S34445), and the special effect lottery process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S34432 that the effect point is less than 7 points or 10 points (NO in step S34432), and when it is determined in step S34433 that the special effect condition is not satisfied (NO in step S34433). ), The special effect lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S34431 that the production hold counter is 1 (NO in step S34431), the variation display (that is, the variation display started from now on) is a variation based on the second and third start opening effective winnings. It is determined whether or not (step S34446). Here, if it is determined that the variation display is variation based on the second and third start opening valid winnings (YES in step S34446), the special second effect flag is turned on (step S34447) and the effect hold counter is reset. (Step S34448). When the change display is a change based on the first start opening valid winning in step S34446 (NO in step S34446), the special effect lottery process is terminated.

  In this way, in the special effect lottery process of FIG. 87, when the effect hold counter is 1 (YES in S34431), the effect points P reach 10 points because the effect points P are stored up to 10 points. When the variable display is performed based on the second and third valid winnings that have been triggered (YES in S34446), the flag for performing the special second effect is set to ON and the effect hold counter is reset (S34447). And S34448).

  On the other hand, even if the production hold counter is 0 (that is, when production point P is not stored up to 10 points) (NO in S34431), production point P may be greater than 6 points and less than 10 points. (YES in S34432) when the special performance condition is satisfied based on the first, second, and third effective winnings (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made) (YES in S34433) ) In order to perform the special first effect and the special second effect, the effect points P are stored up to the upper limit value and the special effect flag is set to ON (S34444 and S34445).

  Further, when the production hold counter is 2 or more (that is, production points P are stored up to 10 points, but before the second and third effective winnings that triggered the production point P to 10 points) If the first, second, and third effective winnings are held and the variable display based on the previously held effective winnings is not yet performed) (YES in S34431), the production point P Is 10 points (NO in S34432), each special effect flag remains OFF without being set ON. Then, when the variation display is made for all of the other first, second, and third effective winnings that are already held, the effect holding counter becomes 1 (NO in S34431), and the effect point P reaches 10 points. In response to the change display based on the second and third effective winnings, the special second effect is set to ON (YES in S34436 to S34448).

  In other words, the second and third effective prizes that triggered the production point P to 10 points until all of the other first, second and third valid prizes already held are displayed in a variable manner. The change display based on and the execution of the special second effect corresponding thereto are reserved (standby). Therefore, as described above, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the special first production is performed (S34287 in FIG. 75), and when the production point P is stored up to 10 points, other effective winnings are already put on hold. If it is, the special second effect is not executed until all the other active winnings that have been put on hold are displayed in a variable manner (so-called hold), so the display of the special first effect and the display of the special second effect are performed. There will be a time difference. As a result, only the special first effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until all the previous holds are consumed, so that the player can obtain the effect point P by the special first effect. It is possible to accurately confirm with a margin that the upper limit has been reached and to play with a sense of expectation until the special second performance is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the production points P are stored up to 10 points based on the second and third effective winnings, if other first, second and third effective winnings are already held, they are put on hold ahead. Even when the special effect condition is satisfied based on the valid winnings made (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made), the storage of the effect point P and the ON setting of the special effect flag are not performed. Not executed. For this reason, even if the previously held effective prize establishes the special effect condition, the special second effect is not performed based on the previously held effective prize but the effect point P is 10 points. It is executed based on the second and third effective winnings that triggered the event. As a result, only the special first effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until all the previous holds are consumed, so that the player can obtain the effect point P by the special first effect. It is possible to accurately confirm with a margin that the upper limit has been reached and to play with a sense of expectation until the special second performance is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, when the effect point P storage lottery is won, regardless of whether the effective winning point from which the effect point P storage lottery is performed is the first start opening effective winning or the second / third starting opening effective winning. Special effects are performed. On the other hand, when the special effect is performed because the effect point P reaches 10 points without performing the effect point P storage lottery, the special effect is performed only when the effective winning is the second and third starting opening effective winnings. Is done.

  In addition, when the special first effect and the special second effect are performed, when the effect point P storage lottery is won, both effects are displayed in the same variation, whereas the effect point P storage lottery is performed. When the special effect is performed because the effect point P has reached 10 points, the first special symbol hold number storage means 628 and the second special symbol hold number storage means when the effect point P reaches 10 points. Both effects are not always displayed in the same variation depending on the number of holds held by 630. Specifically, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the display of the special first production is started, and the variable display based on the second and third effective winnings that triggered the production point P to 10 points. When it is performed, the special second effect is started.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect point P is stored (added) in response to the fact that the second / third start opening valid winning flag is ON or the effect point P storage lottery is won. When the point P reaches the upper limit value, the special effect flag (the special first effect flag and / or the special second effect flag) is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, according to the fact that the second and third start opening valid winning flags are ON or the winning of the production point P storage lottery, the puzzles are combined, and when this puzzle is completed, the special production flag is set. It may be. In addition, a plurality of predetermined missions are cleared one by one in response to the fact that the second and third start opening valid winning flags are set or the stage point P storage lottery is won, and all the predetermined missions are cleared. The special effect flag may be turned on when the is cleared. That is, a condition for setting the special effect flag is set, and this condition is cleared when the second and third start opening effective winning flags are ON or when the effect point P storage lottery is won. Any configuration may be used as long as it approaches the direction in which it is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery result is derived by the variable display by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710, and the special effect is displayed separately from the variable display. Not limited to this. For example, you may make it derive | lead-out the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means 700 or the 2nd special symbol lottery means 710 by special production.

  Next, a mode in which the effect points P are stored and displayed in the effect image display device 115 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage display mode of the effect points P performed in response to the second / third start opening effective winning flag being ON. FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage display mode of the effect points P performed in response to winning of the effect point P storage lottery.

  The effect image display device 115 has an effect point display area 1154 as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. In the effect point display area 1154, an effect point 1 display unit 1154a to an effect point 10 display unit 1154j composed of 10 frames are displayed, and the display color in the frame changes every time the effect point P is stored. . Therefore, the player refers to the effect point display area 1154, so that both the achievement upper limit, which is the maximum value at which the effect points P can be stored, and the progress status, which is the accumulated value of the currently stored effect points P, are displayed. It is possible to grasp at the same time. For example, when the effect point P is 0, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), all the frames of the ten display units 1154a to 1154j are displayed in the same color as the background color (in the drawing, for convenience, white Is displayed).

  In this effect point display area 1154, effect points P are stored and displayed one by one as the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. Regardless of the number of reservations of the means 630 and the maximum number of reservations (four in this case), up to ten effect points P that can be displayed on the display units 1154a to 1154j can be stored and displayed.

  First, the storage display mode of the effect point P performed in response to the second / third start opening valid winning flag being ON will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89A shows an initial state (that is, a state where both the number of holdings and the effect point P are 0).

  When the game ball wins the first start opening 390, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the third hold storage display portion 1151a is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Are displayed in the display mode. On the other hand, the display colors are all maintained in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j. This indicates that the production point P is maintained at 0.

  When the game ball is effectively won at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), in the holding display area 1150, the holding number by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is added. While the 2nd display mode is displayed, the display color in the frame of the production | presentation point 1 display part 1154a changes. Note that the display colors in the frames of the effect point 2 display unit 1154b to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j are maintained. Thereby, the player can grasp that the production point P is 1.

  As described above, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the effect points P are stored one by one, and the stored effect points P are displayed with an indicator. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start port 390, the effect points P are not stored. That is, when the game ball wins at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the effect point P for displaying a predetermined special effect is stored. The stored effect points P are indicators that can be visually recognized by the player in the effect point display area 1154, and are stored and displayed in a manner approaching the predetermined achievement upper limit.

  Therefore, the player can confirm the remaining number of points necessary until a predetermined special effect, and can visually confirm that the player has won the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. That is, when a player wins a game ball to the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the winning is not only an opportunity for internal processing such as a win determination or a variable display, but the player himself / herself plays a game ball. Since it is possible to visually grasp the production point P that has been won and stored, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation and sense of security.

  Further, since the game balls are less likely to win the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 than the first starting port 390 (except for the short-time gaming state), the second starting port 392 or the third starting port. When the game ball is won in 394, the production point P is stored as a privilege for the player. Thereby, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation when the game ball is won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, which is difficult to win.

  The display of the effect point display area 1154 is based on the storage status of the effect points P (progress status for performing the special effect) according to the winning of the game balls to the start openings 390, 392, and 394. It may be displayed up to a predetermined achievement upper limit. Therefore, when the game ball wins at the first start opening 390, the effect point P may be increased, or the effect point P may be increased even if the special symbol reservation number storage means 628, 630 does not hold it. Also good.

  FIG. 89 (d) is a diagram showing that the effect points P are 9 points. That is, the display colors in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 9 display unit 1154i have changed, and the display color in the frame of the effect point 10 display unit 1154j is the same color as the background color. At this time, when the game ball is effectively won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the display color within the frame of the effect point 10 display unit 1154j changes as shown in FIG. Thereby, the player can grasp that the production point P has reached the upper limit of 10 points. In the hold display area 1150, the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is displayed in a stored state. In FIG. 89 (e), the third reserved storage display unit 1151c changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  When the effect point P reaches 10 points, a character appears above the effect point display area 1154. Then, the hold based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that caused the production point P to reach 10 points (in FIG. 89 (e), it is displayed on the third hold storage display unit 1151c. The character continues to dance above the effect point display area 1154 until the change display is performed. Further, while the character continues to dance above the effect point display area 1154, the display colors in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j are changed. That is, the special effect has not yet been displayed until the on-hold variable display based on the effective winnings at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the effect point P to reach 10 points. Nevertheless, the display of the derivation progress status (ie, the number of effect points) for deriving the special effect is continued. In other words, even when the production point P reaches 10 points, even if the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is 1 or more (that is, stored by the second special symbol hold number storage means 630). Even if the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 1 or more), the display of the number of effect points is maintained and the variable display based on the counter value (the holding) is performed. Thereby, the game is straddled across a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the production point P to reach 10 points. It is possible to continue to give a sense of expectation to the person, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Then, when the variation display of the hold based on the effective winning at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 that causes the production point P to reach 10 points is started, as shown in FIG. 89 (f). The character dancing above the effect point display area 1154 moves to approximately the center of the effect image display device 115 and is displayed in an enlarged manner. A series of effect display by such characters corresponds to the special effect of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the aspect in which the character continues to dance above the effect point display area 1154 corresponds to the special first effect, and the character dancing above the effect point display area 1154 is substantially at the center of the effect image display device 115. The aspect enlargedly displayed on the part corresponds to the special second effect. Therefore, the special first effect is displayed immediately regardless of the number of holds when the effect point P reaches 10 points by the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. On the other hand, the special second effect is effective for the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the effect point P reaches 10 points by the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. If a valid winning is held in addition to the winning, it will be displayed after the variable display based on the holding is completed.

  Thus, when the production point P is stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10 points) due to the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the production point P is a predetermined achievement upper limit. Since the special first effect that solicits the fact that the player has reached is displayed, the player can easily grasp that the special effect has been obtained, and can maintain the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the special 2nd effect which is the special production privilege regarding derivation | leading-out of a lottery result is performed based on the achievement point P having reached the predetermined achievement upper limit, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Then, when both the special first effect and the special second effect are finished, that is, the suspension based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the effect point P to reach 10 points. When the variable display is finished, the effect point P is reset to 0, and the effect point P is displayed in the effect point display area 1154 in a mode where it is 0.

  In the present embodiment, the effect point P is also reset when a jackpot game (more specifically, a long game) is started, and the storage of the effect points P is started from 0 after the jackpot game ends. As a result, with the jackpot game as an opportunity, the player can enter the game with a new feeling. In addition, during the jackpot game, even if a game ball wins the second starting port 392, the effect points are not stored, and therefore the storage status of the effect points is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the unnaturalness that the newly displayed effect points are not 0 after the end of the jackpot game.

  Next, the storage display mode of the effect point P performed in response to winning the effect point P storage lottery will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90A shows a state in which the effect points P displayed in the effect point display area 1154 are 7 points. That is, the display colors in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 7 display unit 1154g are changed, and the display colors in the frames of the effect point 8 display unit 1154h to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j are the background color. It is the same color.

  When the game ball wins an effective winning at the first start port 390, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the hold display area 1150, the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (first special symbol hold number storage means 628). Is displayed in a mode in which (the number of hold by) is added. Note that when the game ball effectively wins the first start opening 390, the CPU 611 receives an effect command from the main control board 510 and the variation pattern reception flag is turned on (see step S329 in FIG. 72). If the special effect condition is satisfied, effect point P storage processing (see step S34444 in FIG. 87) is performed. Here, the special effect condition is an effect point P performed in response to the effect command received in step S321 being a specific variation pattern and the effect command received in step S321 being a specific variation pattern. Winning the storage lottery. In addition, it is a precondition for special production conditions to be satisfied that a production point is more than a predetermined threshold (7 points in this embodiment) and less than an achievement upper limit (10 points).

  Here, “greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value” means a value that reaches a predetermined achievement upper limit value when a game ball is slightly awarded to the second start port 392. In the present embodiment, since the achievement upper limit value is 10 points, a value that reaches the achievement upper limit value, that is, 7 points becomes a predetermined threshold value when about 3 game balls win the second starting port 392. In addition, when the predetermined achievement upper limit is 100 points, for example, a value that reaches the achievement upper limit when about 3 to 5 game balls win the second starting port 392, that is, about 95 to 97 points is predetermined. It becomes a threshold value. In other words, if the difference between the stored performance points and the predetermined achievement upper limit is too large, the player plays the game thinking that the predetermined achievement upper limit is not reached, but in a short time When the predetermined achievement upper limit is reached, attention is drawn to the winning of the game ball at the second start port 392, and interest is drawn to the trend of the game ball. At this time, it is usual to feel that the predetermined achievement upper limit is not reached only by winning one ball at the second starting port 392, but at this time, the production points are stored together such as 2 points or 3 points. Thus, it is possible to give a surprise to the player, thereby giving a great sense of expectation to the player and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In the effect point P storage process, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the suspension based on winning in the first start port 390 that is the basis for the effect point P storage process (in this embodiment, FIG. 90 (b)). ) Is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1151b), the display is stored and displayed until the production point P reaches the upper limit of 10 points, and the special first Production is performed. Then, in this same variable display, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the special second effect is performed subsequent to the special first effect.

  Thus, even when the production point P is not stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10 points), the production point P is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (here, 7 points), and When the special effect condition is satisfied (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made), the effect point P for displaying the predetermined special effect is stored. . In other words, even if the difference between the stored production point P and the predetermined upper limit value (here, 10 points) is 2 or more, the special production condition is satisfied as long as the difference is within a small difference range of 3 or less. If is established, it means that the production point P is stored. The stored effect points P are indicators that can be visually recognized by the player in the effect point display area 1154, and are stored and displayed in a manner approaching the predetermined achievement upper limit.

  Therefore, the player can confirm the remaining number of points necessary until a predetermined special performance, and that the special performance condition is established based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 390, 392, 394. I can confirm. And the special 1st production which teaches that the production | presentation point P has reached the predetermined achievement upper limit, and the special 2nd production which is a special production privilege regarding derivation | leading-out of a lottery result are displayed as a series of special productions. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation to obtain a privilege of a series of special effects (first special effect and special second effect) even if the effect points P are not stored up to a predetermined upper limit value. Can be maintained and improved.

  In addition, regarding the effect point P storage process performed in response to winning of the effect point P storage lottery, in the present embodiment, the effect command received based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start port 390 is specified. Although the effect point P storage lottery is performed when the effect command indicates the fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the effect command based on the fact that the game ball is effectively won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is a command indicating a specific variation pattern, the effect point P is always performed without performing the effect point P storage lottery. You may make it perform a storage process.

  In addition, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a short win or a small hit, the effect item in the game state after the short hit game or the small hit game is executed. An effect using a game ball by 420 is performed. The effect using the game ball by the effect agent 420 is not always performed immediately after the short hit game or the small hit game ends. Therefore, when the production point P becomes 10 points between the end of the short hit game or the small hit game and the production using the game ball by the production role 420, or the production point P Even if the storage lottery is won, a special effect is performed.

  As described above, when the production point P reaches 10 points, until the change display based on the hold by the second special symbol holding number storage means 630 that triggered the production point P to 10 points, is performed. Display of special effects is put on hold.

  In this way, the change display based on the hold by the second special symbol holding number storage means 630 that triggered the effect point P to 10 points is managed by the effect hold counter 631. More specifically, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the number of second special symbols stored in the second special symbol storage unit 630 (see FIG. 29) at this time is used as the production reservation counter value. Remember. Then, each time the variable display is performed by the second special symbol image display control means 615 (see FIG. 29), one is subtracted from the effect suspension counter value. When the production hold counter value becomes 1, the variable display based on the hold of the second special symbol stored by the second special symbol hold number storage means 630 that triggered the production point P to 10 points is performed. And the second special effect is displayed. The first special effect is performed when the effect point P reaches 10 points.

[About game effects]
Next, typical ones of the game effect modes (including the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153) executed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the “game effect mode” refers to effects such as effects by the effect image display device 115 (including variations of the decorative pattern 1153), effects by the effect accessory 420, sound effects output from the speakers 18 and 57, and the like. This is a concept including various effects such as an opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 executed in accordance with the gaming state.

  In the “game effect mode”, an effect in which a character imitating a person sings music (hereinafter referred to as a character singing effect) may be executed. In the present embodiment, there are four characters (here, a first character to a fourth character) having different hairstyles and clothes for a specific person. In the “character singing effect”, images (including moving images) representing the singing actions corresponding to the first to fourth characters are displayed on the effect image display device 115, and from the speakers 18 and 57 to each character. The unique music (here, music A to music D) is output as audio.

  In addition, the “music piece” in the present embodiment includes three parts of an introduction part (intro part), a first half part, and a second half part, and one piece of music is configured as a whole by combining the parts. Specifically, the “introduction section (intro section)” is a musical tone at the beginning of a song, and makes the player conceive the title of the song and the subsequent musical tone. The “first half” is a musical sound of a part following the intro part of the music, and includes at least the first half of the main part (so-called rust part) of the music. The “second half part” is a musical sound of the part following the first half part of the music, and includes at least the second half of the main part of the music (a so-called chorus part).

  In this embodiment, the “music piece” is composed of the introduction part (intro part) and the main part (rust part), but may be a series of music from the introduction part to the end of the music piece. In addition, “musical sound” means a part of music. Therefore, only the introduction part (intro part), only the first half part, and only the second half part correspond to musical sounds. The musical sound is not limited to one phrase, and may be a plurality of phrases.

[Regarding normal fluctuation mode]
First, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a “normal variation mode” that is the most basic game effect mode will be described. This “normal variation mode” is a mode for deriving the winning or losing of the lottery result without performing a special effect (for example, an intro effect or a chance eye effect described later) until the reach occurs. Three patterns are included: “out of normal reach” and “per normal length”.

  As described with reference to FIG. 65, “normally off” is an effect mode in which the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c stop at different symbols that are completely unrelated (that is, , Deviation fluctuation without reach production). Note that, as described above, the “normal deviation” is a variation number 1 to 7 depending on whether the variation is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, whether or not the short-time operation is performed, whether or not the certain variation operation is performed, and the number of holdings. Is selected (see FIG. 67).

  As described with reference to FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, “normal reach failure” means that the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are the same, and only the stop symbol in the middle symbol row 1153b is present. It is an effect mode that stops at a different symbol (that is, deviation fluctuation with reach effect). 65 corresponds to the fluctuation based on the “normal deviation” of the fluctuation numbers 8 and 9 (see FIG. 53), and the “normal reach deviation” in FIG. (Refer to FIG. 56).

  As described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, the “normal length hit” is an effect mode in which the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b all stop at the same symbol (that is, the jackpot variation) ). Note that “per normal length” in FIG. 65 corresponds to a variation based on “per normal length” of variation number 10 (see FIG. 45), and “per normal length” in FIG. This corresponds to a variation based on “winning” (see FIG. 47).

  In addition, in both “out of normal reach” and “per normal length”, all symbol variation periods in which all symbol sequences 1153a to 1153c are displayed are changed, and the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c are stopped at the same symbol. The reach variation period in which only the middle symbol 1153b varies. In addition, not only “out of normal reach” and “per normal length”, but also in the variable display where the reach described below occurs, it is composed of at least the entire symbol change period and the reach change period. In the all symbol variation period, variation display of all symbols is performed and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 18 and 57. The reach variation period is reached after the entire symbol variation period, and a specific musical tone (a specific portion including a chorus portion) of a predetermined music is output from the speakers 18 and 57.

[Regarding normal special mode]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when normal reach is established in the “normal variation mode” (see FIG. 65D or 66C), a sense of expectation for hitting the normal reach is urged. A “normal special mode” which is a game effect mode with a special performance will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a mode displayed on the effect image display device 115 when the “normal special mode” is executed. That is, FIG. 91 (A) is a diagram showing a mode of a character singing effect displayed after normal reach is established, FIG. 91 (B) is a diagram showing a mode of an encore effect, and FIGS. 91 (C) to (F). ) Is a diagram showing an aspect at the time of singing the character displayed after the encore effect.

  As shown in FIG. 91A, after the normal reach is established, the middle symbol row 1153b is scrolled and the singing effect of the character is executed. In other words, the singing action by the first character is displayed on the effect image display device 115, and the first half of the music unique to the character (here, music A) is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the action. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to fluctuations based on 11,76 “out of song reach A (before encore)” (see FIGS. 53 and 56). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation”, and “ This corresponds to fluctuation based on “reach A per normal length” (see FIGS. 45 and 47).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), when the first character is hidden behind the curtain by the curtain that is closed from the left and right directions, a display further prompting the player to press the effect selection switch 60 is displayed. At the same time, the sound imitating the clapping is output from the speaker 18. That is, an encore effect is made to request further singing of music for the first character hidden behind the curtain. Then, after the effect selection switch 60 is pressed or a predetermined time elapses, any of the effects shown in FIGS. 91C to 91F is displayed. If the effects of FIGS. 91C to 91F are not executed and the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed. The fluctuation is “out-of-track fluctuation with reach production” and corresponds to the fluctuation based on “No. Song Reach A (after encore)” of fluctuation numbers 12 and 77 (see FIGS. 53 and 56).

  In FIG. 91 (C), the first character hidden behind the curtain in FIG. 91 (B) is displayed again, and the second half of the music A is the speaker 18, in accordance with the action of the first character singing. 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to fluctuations based on 14,79 “Song Reach A Long Out” (see FIGS. 53 and 56). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation” and the “song of variation numbers 15 and 80” This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “reach A long length” (see FIGS. 45 and 47).

  In FIG. 91 (D), a second character having a different hairstyle, clothes, etc. is displayed from the first character, and in accordance with the action of the second character singing, a music unique to the character (here, The latter half of the music B) is output from the speakers 18, 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “Song reach B (via song reach A)” of 16, 81 (see FIGS. 53 and 56). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation” and the “song of variation numbers 17 and 82” This corresponds to the fluctuation based on “reach B (via song reach A) per length” (see FIGS. 45 and 47).

  In FIG. 91 (E), a third character having a different hairstyle, clothes, etc. is displayed from the first and second characters, and in accordance with the singing action of the third character, Here, the latter half of the music piece C) is output from the speakers 18 and 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to the fluctuation based on “Song reach C (via song reach A)” 18, 83 (see FIGS. 53 and 56). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation” and the “song of variation numbers 19 and 84” This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “reach C (via song reach A) per length” (see FIGS. 45 and 47).

  In FIG. 91 (F), a fourth character having a different hairstyle, clothes, etc. is displayed from the first to third characters, and in accordance with the movement of the fourth character singing, Here, the latter half of the music D) is output from the speaker 18. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to fluctuations based on 20,85 “song reach D (via song reach A)” (see FIGS. 53 and 56). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation” and the “song of variation numbers 21 and 86” This corresponds to a variation based on “reach D (via song reach A) per length” (see FIGS. 45 and 47).

  As described above, in the “normal special mode” of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for normal reach and suppress the decrease in interest by the singing effect or the encore effect of the character.

[Intro special aspects]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special effect that promotes a sense of expectation for reach by executing the singing effect of the character before the reach occurs during the symbol variation (that is, during the entire symbol variation period). The “intro special mode”, which is a game effect mode accompanied with, will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. In the present embodiment, an “intro special mode” is provided for each of the second character (song B), the third character (song C), and the fourth character (song D).

  First, the “intro special mode” of the second character (music B) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect image display device 115 when the “intro special aspect” of the second character (music B) is executed. That is, FIG. 92A is a diagram showing an aspect before the start of change of the decorative symbol 1153, FIG. 92B is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 being changed before reach, and FIG. FIG. 92 (D) is a diagram showing an aspect at the time of the flashlight effect, FIG. 92 (D) is a diagram showing an aspect at the time of singing the second character before the reach, and FIGS. 92 (E) to (F) are diagrams after the reach. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of the singing performance of 2 characters.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (B), in this “intro special mode”, similarly to the above-mentioned “normal variation mode”, first, the scroll variation of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c is started. The display screen of the effect image display device 115 suddenly becomes dark during the scroll fluctuation. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), after an effect imitating a flash (flash light) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), the singing operation of the music by the second character is displayed, In accordance with the singing operation, only the introduction part (intro part) of the music B is output from the speakers 18 and 57. As described above, in the “intro special mode”, the introduction section (intro section) of the music B is output instead of the sound effect output during the entire symbol variation period. After the singing effect (ie, intro effect) of the intro part by the second character, if the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c stop at different symbols (ie, reach occurs) If not, the variation of the decorative pattern 1153 is “out-of-track variation without reach effect”, and corresponds to variation based on the variation number 22 “out of song reach B intro” (see FIGS. 53 and 56).

  However, even if the reach does not occur after the intro effect performed during the entire symbol variation period of the music B (that is, when the reach variation period does not occur), the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right When the symbol row 1153c stops at a predetermined related symbol after the scroll change, the short hit or the small win game state is won, and thus the short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state occurs. As a result, in the case where the introduction part (intro part) of the music B is output instead of the sound effect during the entire symbol variation period, even if the reach is not reached, there is a possibility that the player wins a short win. Therefore, a player's discouragement can be reduced and the fall of interest can be suppressed. The variation of the decorative pattern 1153 corresponds to the variation based on the variation number 23 “out of song reach B intro (short hit)” or the variation number 24 “out of song reach B intro (small hit)” (FIG. 50). reference).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), if the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c become the same after the intro effect (that is, when the shift to the reach variation period), it is always performed. A reach (hereinafter referred to as “super reach”) in which the expected value won in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is relatively higher than the normal reach occurs. Thus, when the intro effect is performed during the entire symbol variation period (that is, when the introduction part (intro part) of the music is output instead of the sound effect), the reach variation period is passed after the entire symbol variation period. Since a super reach having an expected value higher than that of normal reach is always derived, the player plays a game in the hope of shifting to the reach change period, and can suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, when the intro effect is performed, the introduction part (intro part) of the music is output instead of the sound effect even in the entire symbol variation period, so even in the entire symbol variation period in which the symbol variation can only be visually recognized. The pleasure of whether to shift to the reach fluctuation period is increased, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that super reach is performed via normal reach. Therefore, when the super reach is performed, the shift to the super reach is performed after the normal reach is performed. Therefore, the reach variation period is longer than that in the case where only the normal reach is performed.

  The “expected value” is a probability that the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 (hereinafter simply referred to as “lottery result” in this paragraph) is not selected. And the probability selected in the case of winning, and if the expected value is high, the sense of expectation that has been won increases. Specifically, for example, when there is a reach mode A and a reach mode B as reach modes, the probability that the reach A and the reach B are selected when the lottery result is out of place is 1/2, When the probability that the reach A and the reach B are selected when the lottery result is a win is 9/10 and 1/10, respectively, the reach value of the reach A is higher than that of the reach B. In addition, the probability that reach A and reach B are selected when the lottery result is off is 9/10 and 1/10, respectively, and reach A and reach B are selected when the lottery result is win. When the probability of being played is one-half, reach B has a higher expected value than reach A.

  And if it shifts to a reach variation period after the intro effect performed in all the symbol variation periods, the first half part of the music B will be output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing action by the second character. Here, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation This corresponds to a fluctuation based on the number 25 “single reach B first half off” (see FIGS. 53 and 56). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation”, and the variation number 26 “song reach B” This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “per second half length” (see FIGS. 45 and 47).

  Furthermore, when the lottery result is not derived in the singing performance of the second character (first half of the music B) shown in FIG. 92 (E), the singing action by the second character is performed as shown in FIG. 92 (F). In addition, the latter half of the music B is output from the speaker 18. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to a fluctuation based on 27 “Long-term reach of Song Reach B” (see FIGS. 53 and 56). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation”, and the variation number 28 “song reach B” This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “per second half length” (see FIGS. 45 and 47).

  Next, the “intro special mode” of the third character (song C) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect image display device 115 when the “intro special aspect” of the third character (music C) is executed. That is, FIG. 93 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 93 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 being changed before reach, and FIG. FIG. 93 (D) is a diagram showing a mode at the time of flashlight production, FIG. 93 (D) is a diagram showing a mode at the time of singing the third character before reach, and FIGS. 93 (E) to 93 (F) are views after the reach. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of the singing performance of 3 characters.

  The flow of the “intro special mode” of the third character (music C) (see FIGS. 93A to 93F) is the flow of the “intro special mode” of the second character (music B) (FIG. 92 ( A) to (F)) are basically the same. That is, in this “intro special mode”, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), in the effect image display device 115, the display screen suddenly becomes dark during the scroll fluctuation of the decorative design 1153, and as shown in FIG. 93 (C). An effect imitating flash (flash light) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93D, the singing operation of the music by the third character is displayed, and only the introduction part (intro) of the music C is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing operation. The If reach occurs after the intro effect, the first half of the song C is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing action by the third character. Furthermore, when the lottery result is not derived in the singing effect of the third character (the first half of the song C), as shown in FIG. 93 (F), the latter half of the song C in accordance with the singing action by the third character. Are output from the speakers 18 and 57.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 29 to 35) for the “intro special mode” of the third character (song C) is also used for each variation command (intro special mode) of the second character (song B). The same as the variation numbers 22 to 28). However, the above-described flashlight effect is displayed in a different manner in FIGS. 92 (C) and 93 (C) because the display manner differs depending on the music that the character subsequently sings. The third character's singing effect (see FIGS. 93 (D) to (F)) is different from the second character's singing effect (see FIGS. 92 (D) to (F)). And so on.

  Next, the “intro special mode” of the fourth character (song D) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating a mode displayed on the effect image display device 115 when the “intro special mode” of the fourth character (music D) is executed. That is, FIG. 94 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 94 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 during the change before reach, and FIG. FIG. 94 (D) is a diagram showing a mode at the time of flashlight production, FIG. 94 (D) is a diagram showing a mode at the time of singing the fourth character before reach, and FIGS. 94 (E) to (F) are diagrams after the reach. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of the singing effect of 4 characters.

  The flow of the “intro special mode” of the fourth character (music D) (see FIGS. 94A to 94F) is also the flow of the “intro special mode” of the second character (music B) (FIG. 92 ( A) to (F)) are basically the same. That is, in this “intro special mode”, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), in the effect image display device 115, the display screen suddenly becomes dark during the scroll fluctuation of the decorative design 1153, and as shown in FIG. 94 (C). An effect imitating flash (flash light) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94D, the singing operation of the music by the fourth character is displayed, and only the introduction part (intro) of the music D is output from the speaker 18 in accordance with the singing operation. If reach occurs after the intro effect, the first half of the music piece D is output from the speaker 18 in accordance with the action of the fourth character singing. Furthermore, when the lottery result is not derived in the singing effect of the fourth character (the first half of the music D), as shown in FIG. 94 (F), the second half of the music D is synchronized with the action of the fourth character singing. Are output from the speaker 18.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 36 to 42) for the “intro special mode” of the fourth character (music D) is also used for each variation command (intro special mode) of the second character (music B). The same as the variation numbers 22 to 28). However, the above-described flashlight effect is displayed in a different manner in FIGS. 92 (C) and 94 (C) because the display manner differs depending on the music that the character subsequently sings. In addition, the singing effect of the fourth character (see FIGS. 94D to 94F) is the singing effect of the second character (see FIGS. 92D to 92F) and the singing effect of the third character. (See FIGS. 93 (D) to (F)).

  As described above, in the “intro special mode” of the present embodiment, the singing action of the character is displayed before the reach occurs during the symbol variation (that is, the entire symbol variation period), and the music introduction unit ( Intro part) is output. When reach is established by this intro effect, the continuation of the intro part (the first half part and the second half part) in the music is output together with the singing action of the character. At this time, the super reach is suddenly displayed without going through the normal reach. That is, the reach form in which the continuation of the intro part (first half part and second half part) in the music outputted during the entire symbol variation period is output together with the singing action of the character corresponds to super reach. In this way, the sudden reach of the player can be surprised by the display of the super reach, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when an intro effect is performed during the entire symbol variation period (that is, when a music introduction part (intro part) is output instead of the predetermined sound effect), instead of the predetermined sound effect during the entire symbol variation period. The general musical sound that is the same music as the specific musical sound (rust part) that is output during the reach fluctuation period and includes a part (intro part) that is different from the specific musical sound (rust part) is output. When the intro part of the music is output, the sense of expectation that a reach mode having a higher expected value than that of normal reach is derived increases, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the musical sound output during the reach variation period includes the phrase of the chorus part that is most exciting in the music. Thereby, a player's mood can be raised by the combination of the effect display in the effect image display apparatus 115 and the musical sound output from the speakers 18 and 57, and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the general musical sound that is output instead of the specified sound effect during the entire symbol variation period is a musical tone that includes phrases related to the musical composition that is output during the reach variation period, so what music is output when the reach variation period is entered. The player can be reminded of what is being done, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the general musical sound that is output instead of the predetermined sound effect during the entire symbol variation period is a musical tone that includes a phrase applied to the introduction part (intro part) of the music that is output during the reach variation period. If so, it is possible to give the player an interesting feeling such as “intro quiz” that predicts what kind of music will be output, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the entire symbol variation period.

[About special aspects of chance]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, “chance” that is a game effect mode with a special effect that derives a small hit or short hit and directs a transition to a mode that is likely to be advantageous to the player. The “special aspect of the eye” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating a mode displayed on the effect image display device 115 when the “chance eye special mode” is executed. That is, FIG. 95 (A) shows an aspect in which the decorative symbol 1153 represents a small hit or short hit, and FIG. 95 (B) shows an aspect in which a part of the decorative symbol 1153 changes to an almighty symbol (A symbol). FIG. 95 (C) is a diagram illustrating a mode for deriving that the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened, and FIGS. 95 (D) to (E) are diagrams illustrating modes during a mode transition chance. 95 (F) to (G) are diagrams illustrating the mode of the first mode, and FIGS. 95 (H) to (I) are diagrams illustrating the mode of the second mode.

  The following “chance eye special mode” is executed at the time of fluctuation based on the “chance eye (short hit)” of the fluctuation number 43 or the “chance eye (small hit)” of the fluctuation number 44.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (A), when the “song” symbol is stopped on the left symbol column 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped on the right symbol column 1153c, and the “legend” symbol is stopped on the middle symbol column 1153b. The decorative design 1153 derives a short hit or a small hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and a part of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c changes to an almighty symbol (A symbol). Specifically, in parallel with the scroll variation of the decorative symbol 1153, the “song” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → the “song” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c → the “princess” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → the “song” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c. The number of decorative symbols 1153 is the almighty symbol (2 to 6 in this embodiment) by the number set in the order of “princess” symbol → “legend” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → “legend” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c. (Design A).

  Here, the almighty symbol (A symbol) will be described repeatedly. In a change after a part of the decorative symbol 1153 changes to an almighty symbol (A symbol), when one of the stop symbol of the left symbol column 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol column 1153c becomes an almighty symbol (A symbol) Are controlled so that reach always occurs. Further, when both the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are almighty symbols (A symbol), control is performed so that long hits are always generated. Therefore, in FIG. 95 (B), the greater the number of decorative symbols 1153 that change to an almighty symbol (A symbol), the greater the player's sense of expectation for reach or hit, and the lowering of interest can be suppressed.

  The quantity of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is displayed in the lower left part of the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 95 (B)), and each time the almighty symbol (A symbol) is triggered by the occurrence of reach. In addition to returning to the normal symbol before the change (ie, every time it becomes a stop symbol), the quantity of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is subtracted. Therefore, since the player can easily grasp the remaining amount of the almighty symbol (A symbol), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In the present embodiment, up to six of the decorative symbols 1153 (specifically, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c) can be changed to an almighty symbol (A symbol). Conventionally, there has been a change in the decorative design to an almighty design, but all of the decorative designs in a certain design row are changed to an almighty design. This is because, for example, an effect using an almighty symbol is performed only in the variation in which the reach mode is formed. When using an almighty symbol (A symbol) over a plurality of subsequent variations as in the present embodiment, changing all of the symbol columns to an almighty symbol (A symbol) requires frequent reach production. , Can put excessive expectations on the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, by changing the maximum six decorative symbols 1153 to the almighty symbol (A symbol), it becomes possible to produce a disengagement that does not use the almighty symbol (A symbol). The load is reduced. In addition, the game can be made appropriate without giving excessive expectations to the player.

  Then, after the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 1153 shown in FIG. 95 (B) is stopped, the short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 95C, an effect (for example, “Aim for the top!”) That prompts the game ball to be ejected toward the effect opening / closing device 398 is displayed. At the same time, as described above, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed twice as “short hit” or “small hit”. One of the game balls won in the effect opening / closing device 398 is held by the distribution mechanism 450 until an effect by the effect accessory 420 described later is performed.

  Here, a winning manner to the effect opening / closing device 398 by short hit or small hit will be described with reference to FIG. 96 and FIG. 96 is a front view of the effect image display device 115 and the effect accessory 420 before winning the effect opening / closing device 398, and FIG. 97 is an effect image display device 115 after winning the effect opening / closing device 398. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 450 because the game opening / closing device 398 is in a state where no game ball is won before the short hit or the small hit is executed. As described above, since the accessory guiding path 440 through which the game ball is guided from the effect opening / closing device 398 is formed of a transparent member, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the player side) It can be visually recognized that the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 450.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97, when a game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 by performing a short hit or a small hit, the game ball is held by the distribution mechanism 450. From the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the player side), it is possible to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball rolls on the accessory guide path 440, and the game ball is held by the distribution mechanism 450. Is visible. Then, from the fluctuation after the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 450, the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 450 (in other words, there is a possibility that a mode transition chance described later may be activated). ) To the player (specifically, “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 97) is displayed on the effect image display device 115.

  Returning to FIG. 95, when a game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 450, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a mode transition chance (in this embodiment, “diva chance”). When it is determined that the mode transition chance is to be executed, the mode transition chance accompanied by the effect by the following effect accessory 420 is executed. The mode transition chance of the present embodiment is not necessarily executed by the next change, but is activated after execution of the hold change for the number of times selected by the lottery. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the mode transition chance, the mode transition chance is not executed, and the effect by the effect accessory 420 is not executed.

  Here, the mode transition chance will be described. Since the player cannot determine whether it is a small hit or short hit only by opening / closing operation of the stage effect 420, whether or not the player has shifted to the probable gaming state by short hit by the “mode shift chance” in this embodiment The player's expectation is improved by making it possible to judge to some extent (in other words, whether the normal gaming state remains due to the small hit).

  First, when the mode transition chance is activated, an effect for deriving the mode transition opportunity is displayed as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), an effect of lottery of which mode to shift to among a plurality of modes is displayed along with an effect by an effect for a later-described effect 420. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of modes to be transferred to, a first mode (in this embodiment, “diva mode”) that is highly likely to be a probability variation gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state that is more likely than the first mode Has a high second mode (in this embodiment, “SUPER diva mode”). Further, in this mode transition chance, there is a case where the mode is not shifted to the normal gaming state (in this embodiment, “out”), but here, “first mode” and “first mode” are selected. A case where a lottery is selected as a mode transition destination will be described.

  Here, the mode lottery effect by the effect object 420 executed at the mode transition chance will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a front view of the effect image display device 115 and the effect accessory 420 during the mode lottery effect. As shown in FIG. 98, in the mode lottery effect by the effect object 420, the effect object 420 is rotationally driven and the figure 424 arranged inside the accessory container 422 is the front side (that is, the player side). ) And the game ball held by the distribution mechanism 450 is guided to the first performance rod 426. And the aspect (refer Fig.26 (a)) where the 1st production pole 426 inclined downward toward the 1st performance exit 432, and the 1st production pole 426 downward toward the 2nd production pole guidance port 434 The tilted mode is repeated (FIG. 26B), and an effect operation in which the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the first effect rod 426 is performed. In the present embodiment, when the game ball rolls in the left-right direction, by changing the inclination mode (for example, the degree of inclination) of the first performance pole 426, the performance outlets 432, 436 for winning the game ball are awarded. It has a structure that can be suggested before. Thereby, a lottery result to be described later can be suggested to some extent even during the lottery, and the mode lottery effect does not become monotonous. As a result, the interest of the mode lottery effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the arrow of “first mode” (diva mode) displayed on the effect screen of FIG. 95 (E) points to the first stage 432, and “second mode” ( The arrow of the SUPER Diva mode) points to the second performance exit 436. Therefore, when the first performance pole 426 tilts toward the first performance exit 432 and the game ball wins the first performance exit 432, “first mode” is selected as the mode transition destination. On the other hand, when the first stage 樋 426 tilts toward the second stage 樋 guide port 434 and the game ball rolls on the second stage 樋 428 and wins the second stage 436, the mode transition destination “Second mode” is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 95, when the “first mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the effect item 420, as shown in FIG. 95 (F), the effect of deriving the transition to the “first mode” is obtained. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 95 (G), in the “first mode”, the background effect displayed on the effect image display device 115 is different from the normal mode (see FIG. 65, etc.). The scroll variation of the decorative pattern 1153 is executed. Therefore, by executing the “first mode” that is highly likely to be a probability-changing gaming state, it is possible to improve a player's expectation for winning.

  On the other hand, when the “second mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the effect item 420, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), an effect for deriving the transition to the “second mode” is displayed. . As shown in FIG. 95 (I), in the “second mode”, the background effect displayed on the effect image display device 115 is different from the normal mode (see FIG. 65 and the like) and the “first mode”. In such a display state, scrolling of the decorative symbol 1153 is executed. Therefore, by executing the “second mode” that is more likely to be a probability variation gaming state, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  In addition, as described above, when the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 450, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a mode transition chance (in this embodiment, “diva chance”). However, even when the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 450, the lottery for shifting to the “first mode” or the “second mode” is performed. After the transition to the “first mode” or the “second mode” is determined, an execution lottery based on the variation pattern is performed from the next variation. Only after winning in the execution lottery, the mode is shifted to the “first mode” or the “second mode”. However, when the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 450, the probability of shifting to the “first mode” or the “second mode” is lower than when the game ball is held.

  As described above, in the “chance eye special mode” of the present embodiment, not only a small hit or short win is derived, but also an almighty symbol (A symbol) effect or a mode lottery effect for the director 420 for the effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for winning or mode transition and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball that the player has struck toward the game area 37 is accepted by the effect opening / closing device 398, and the mode transition effect is performed by the figure 424 using the accepted game ball. . As a result, while being a first-class gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with a sense similar to that of a second-class gaming machine (that is, a feeling in which a game result is determined using a game ball that has been struck by itself) As a result, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  The “song” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped in the right symbol row 1153c, and the “legend” symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row 1153b, and then the decorative symbol 1153 is scrolled again. As described above, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c partially change to the almighty symbol (A symbol). In the variation that produces the replacement with the almighty symbol (A symbol), in the “chance eye special mode”, the decorative symbol 1153 is a predetermined symbol (“1”, “3”, “2” in this embodiment). Stopped display. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the variation that produces the replacement to the almighty symbol (A symbol), the decorative symbol 1153 is a predetermined probable big hit symbol (in this embodiment, “1”, “1”, “1”). ) Is displayed in a stopped state. This mode is executed at the time of fluctuation based on the “number of chances (per probability variation length)” of the fluctuation number 45. In this case, the substitution to the almighty symbol (A symbol) is virtually meaningless, but since the probability variation per unit is suddenly derived, it is possible to surprise the player and delight the player. It becomes. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[About long-performing effects]
Next, the “long win effect mode”, which is a game effect mode with a special effect for generating a long hit game in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect image display device 115 when the “long hit effect mode” is executed. That is, FIG. 99 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving long hits, FIGS. 99 (B) to (E) are diagrams showing modes during long hits, and FIGS. 99 (F) to (H) are FIG. The figure which shows the mode at the time of the mode lottery after the end of the long hit game, FIGS. 99 (I) to (J) are views showing the mode after the end of the long hit game.

  First, when the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c become the same stop symbol (that is, when the big hit variation ends), the start of the long hit game is derived as shown in FIG. After that, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed for 15 rounds, and accordingly, the effect image (including characters) of the effect image display device 115 and the sound of the speaker 28 (including music) are hit. Production is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), an effect (for example, an arrow image pointing upward) prompting the player to inject the game ball toward the effect opening / closing device 398 is displayed, and the effect opening / closing device The opening / closing operation 398 is performed for two rounds. Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), an effect (for example, an arrow image pointing downward) that prompts the player to inject the game ball toward the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is displayed, and the jackpot game The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 400 is performed over 12 rounds.

  In the present embodiment, in the 14th round, as shown in FIG. 99D, a plurality of characters (here, the second to fourth characters) are displayed in a selectable manner on the effect image display device 115, and the game The user can select an arbitrary character by pressing the effect selection switch 60. Then, in correspondence with the character selected on the effect screen of FIG. 99 (D), a long hit later mode lottery effect, which will be described later, is executed.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), an effect (for example, an arrow image pointing upward) that prompts the game ball to be ejected toward the effect opening / closing device 398 is displayed, and the effect opening / closing is performed. The opening / closing operation of the device 398 is performed only for one round. With the above, a total of 15 rounds per game is completed. Then, at the end of the long hit game, different long hit after mode lottery effects are executed depending on the character selected on the effect screen of FIG. 99 (D).

  Specifically, when the second character is selected, the long hitting rear mode lottery effect (plate effect) shown in FIG. 99 (F) is executed. In this plate effect, a plurality of panels representing the mode transition destination are sequentially specified while the second character moves, and the second character stops and shifts to the mode represented by the last designated panel. . Further, when the third character is selected, a long hit after mode lottery effect (single notification effect) shown in FIG. 99 (G) is executed. In this one-announcement effect, only the transition destination mode is displayed in accordance with the action of the third character, and the mode is shifted to that mode. In addition, when the fourth character is selected, a long hitting mode lottery effect (an accessory lottery effect) shown in FIG. 99 (H) is executed, and details of the accessory lottery effect will be described later.

  Then, after the end of the long hit game in the present embodiment, if the per long hit is “per short length with probability change” by the long hit mode lottery effect of FIGS. 99 (F) to 99 (H), FIG. 99 ( As shown in I), a transition is made to a probability variation mode (live mode) in which both a probability variation gaming state and a short time gaming state occur. On the other hand, if the per unit length is “regular per unit”, as shown in FIG. 99 (J), after the end of the per unit game, the mode shifts to the short time mode (private mode) in which only the short time gaming state occurs.

  Here, the long hitting mode lottery effect (the accessory lottery effect) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a front view of the effect image display device 115 and the effect accessory 420 at the time of the long hitting mode lottery effect (the accessory lottery effect). In this accessory lottery effect, the mode lottery effect by the effect agent 420 is performed using the game balls held in the distribution mechanism 450 by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 398 for the 15th round.

  That is, when the fourth character is selected on the effect screen shown in FIG. 99D, when the game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 in the 15th round, as in FIG. Is retained. From the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the player side), it is possible to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball rolls on the accessory guide path 440, and the game ball is held by the distribution mechanism 450. Is visible. In the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 in the first and second rounds, the distribution mechanism 450 does not hold the game ball even if a game ball is won. This is because the mode lottery effect by the effect object 420 is executed using the game ball that the player has won in the effect opening / closing device 398 immediately before (ie, the 15th round). Thereby, since the player can surely grasp that the game ball used for the mode lottery effect has been won by himself, the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Therefore, even though it is a first-class gaming machine, it can be played with a sense that the gaming result is determined using a game ball that it has struck like a second-class gaming machine, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest it can.

  In addition, when the second or third character is selected on the effect screen of FIG. 99 (D), the effect by the effect object 420 is not performed, so that the game ball is sent to the effect opening / closing device 398 in the 15th round. Even if a prize is won, the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 450. Further, when the fourth character is selected, an effect by the effect agent 420 is always executed, and therefore an effect for deriving that the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 450 (specifically, FIG. 97). “CHANCE” shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 100, in the mode lottery effect by the effect item 420, the effect item 420 is driven to rotate, and the figure 424 arranged inside the accessory container 422 is the front side (that is, Directed to the player side). Then, the game ball held by the distribution mechanism 450 is guided to the first effect rod 426. And the aspect (refer Fig.26 (a)) where the 1st production pole 426 inclined downward toward the 1st performance exit 432, and the 1st production pole 426 downward toward the 2nd production pole guidance port 434 The tilted mode is repeated (FIG. 26B), and an effect operation in which the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the first effect rod 426 is performed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 100, the arrow of “time reduction mode” (private mode) displayed on the effect screen of FIG. 99 (H) points to the first stage 432 and “probability mode” (live change mode) The (mode) arrow points to the second stage 436. Therefore, when the first performance pole 426 tilts toward the first performance exit 432 and the game ball wins the first performance exit 432, “time reduction mode” is selected as the mode transition destination. On the other hand, when the first stage 樋 426 tilts toward the second stage 樋 guide port 434 and the game ball rolls on the second stage 樋 428 and wins the second stage 436, the mode transition destination “Probability mode” is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 99, when the “probability change mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the effect item 420, the process proceeds to the “probability change mode” as shown in FIG. In the “probability change mode”, the probability change game state and the short-time game state are executed until the next jackpot, and the background of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 115 is the normal mode (see FIG. 65 and the like) and the “short-time mode”. Is different. Therefore, by executing the “probability change mode”, which is a game state that is extremely advantageous for the player, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, when the “short time mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the effect item 420, the mode shifts to the “short time mode” as shown in FIG. In the “short time mode”, the short time gaming state is executed until a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) is changed, and the background of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 115 is the normal mode (see FIG. 65 and the like). Is different. Therefore, by executing the “short time mode”, which is a game state advantageous to the player, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  As described above, in the “long winning effect mode” of the present embodiment, the long winning game is not only generated with various images and sounds, but also the player can arbitrarily select the long winning mode lottery effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In particular, in the long hitting mode lottery effect (actor lottery effect), using the game ball won in the effect opening / closing device 398 immediately before the end of the long hitting game (that is, the 15th round), the effect by the effecting item 420 is performed. Therefore, the expectation for mode transition can be further improved.

[About Probability Game Production Mode]
Next, a “probability game effect mode” that is a game effect mode with a special effect for generating a probable game in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the singing effects (that is, the probability-changing game effect mode) of the second to fourth characters (music B to music D) as described below in the probability-changing game state after the long hit game are as follows. It is executed until derivation per length. Below, the “probability game effect mode” for each character (music) will be described.

  First, the “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an aspect displayed on the effect image display device 115 when the “probability game effect aspect” of the second character (music B) is executed. That is, FIG. 101 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving a probability variation game, and FIGS. 101 (B) to (H) are diagrams showing a mode during a probability variation game.

  As shown in FIG. 101 (A), after the long hit game is completed, the mode is changed to the “probability change mode” (that is, the mode is changed to the probability change game state), and one of the change commands having the change numbers 46 to 54 is selected. In this case, the singing effect of the following second character (song B) is executed based on the change command. That is, as shown in FIGS. 101 (B) to 101 (E), an effect in which the four doors are sequentially closed from the left and right directions (that is, a maximum of four door effects) is performed, and accordingly, the music B Each part is output together with the character's singing performance. Here, the music B is composed of five consecutive parts (first part to fifth part), and the first first part is a prelude to the so-called music B (the same applies to the other music C and D). ). In the probability variation gaming state, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is not a reach effect by a plurality of symbol strings as in the normal gaming state (formally The variation display is performed until the lottery result is derived), and the singing effect itself by the character is the reach effect.

  Specifically, the first first part is output together with the singing effect of the character from the start of the singing effect of the second character (Song B) until the first door is closed (see FIG. 101B). If there is an effect that the second character closes out to the front side of the first door, the singing effect of the character continues and the next second part is output until the second door closes. (See FIG. 101C). If there is an effect that the second character closes out to the front side of the second door, the next third part is output until the singing effect of the character continues and the third door closes. (See FIG. 101D). If an effect of exiting to the front side of the third door where the second character is closed is made, the next fourth part is output until the singing effect of the character is continued and the fourth door is closed. (See FIG. 101 (E)). Finally, if an effect is made to escape to the front side of the fourth door where the second character closes, the singing effect of the character continues and the final part (fifth part) is output (FIG. 101). (See (G)). In other words, if the second character can sequentially exit to the front side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character continues and the continuation portion in the music B is output from the speaker 18. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), when the second character is hidden behind the closing door, the singing effect of the character ends and the output of the music B is also interrupted. Thus, the case where the singing effect of the second character is interrupted by the door effect and falls off corresponds to the change based on the fluctuation number 46 “song reach B door nth off”.

  The “n-th” means that in the probability variation game effect mode, the door effect is continuously performed up to four times as described above, and what number (n-th) door effect determines the change. Indicates. The same applies to the following.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), if the singing effect continues without being concealed by any of the four doors, the entire music B corresponding to the character is output without interruption. That's right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 101 (H), the jackpot variation is executed in which the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c all have the same stop symbol, and the second character derives the jackpot. An effect of taking a predetermined pose is performed. Thereafter, the long winning game and the long winning effect mode are executed in the same manner as described above.

  In this way, the case where the singing effect of the music B by the second character is completed corresponds to the fluctuation based on the fluctuation number 51 “per-running length of the song reach B”. Even if the singing effect of the music B is interrupted by the door effect, the singing effect of the second character may be revived and win. This corresponds to the fluctuations based on the fluctuation numbers 52 to 54 “per song n-recovery door B nth revival length”. In addition, when the singing production of the music B is interrupted by the door production, but the small hit or short win is won, the variation numbers 47 to 48 “song reach B door nth short hit” and the variation numbers 49 to 50 This corresponds to the fluctuation based on “Song Reach B door nth small hit”.

  Next, the “probability game effect mode” of the third character (song C) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a mode displayed on the effect image display device 115 when the “probability game effect mode” of the third character (music C) is executed. That is, FIG. 102 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving a probability variation game, and FIGS. 102 (B) to (H) are diagrams showing a mode during a probability variation game.

  The flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the third character (music C) (see FIGS. 102A to 102H) is the flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B) (see FIG. 102). 101 (A) to (H)). As shown in FIG. 102 (A), after the long hit game is over, the mode is shifted to the “probability change mode”, and when one of the change commands having the change numbers 55 to 63 is selected, the following third character ( The singing effect of the music piece C) is executed based on the variation command. That is, as shown in FIGS. 102 (B) to 102 (E), a maximum of four door effects are performed, and if the third character can sequentially escape to the front side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character is performed. The continuation of the song C is continuously output from the speaker 18. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), when the third character is concealed on the back side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character ends and the output of the song C is also interrupted. Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), if the singing effect is continued without the third character being concealed by any of the four doors, the entire song C corresponding to the character is output without interruption. That's right. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 102 (H), the jackpot variation is executed, and the third character takes an effect of taking a predetermined pose for deriving the jackpot, and thereafter, the long win game and the long win effect mode are performed. Executed.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 55 to 63) for the “probability change game effect mode” of the third character (song C) is also changed for each “change probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B). This is the same as the command (variation numbers 46 to 54). However, the third character's singing effect (see FIGS. 102 (B) to (G)) is different from the second character's singing effect (see FIGS. 101 (B) to (G)). And so on.

  Next, the “probability game effect mode” of the fourth character (music D) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an aspect displayed on the effect image display device 115 when the “probability game effect aspect” of the fourth character (music D) is executed. That is, FIG. 103 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving a probability variation game, and FIGS. 103 (B) to 103 (H) are diagrams showing a mode during a probability variation game.

  The flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the fourth character (music D) (see FIGS. 103A to 103H) is the flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B) (FIG. 103). 101 (A) to (H)). As shown in FIG. 103 (A), after the long hit game is over, the mode shifts to the “probability change mode”, and when one of the change commands having the change numbers 64 to 72 is selected, the following fourth character ( The singing effect of the music D) is executed based on the change command. That is, as shown in FIGS. 103 (B) to 103 (E), a maximum of four door effects are performed, and if the fourth character can escape to the front side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character continues. Then, the continuation of the music piece D is output from the speaker 18. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), when the fourth character is concealed behind the closing door, the singing effect of the character ends and the output of the music D is also interrupted. Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), when the singing effect continues without the fourth character being concealed by any of the four doors, the entire music D corresponding to the character is output without interruption. That's right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 103 (H), the jackpot variation is executed, and an effect is taken in which the fourth character takes a predetermined pose for deriving the jackpot. Thereafter, the long win game and the long win effect mode are performed. Executed.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 64 to 72) for the “probability change game effect mode” of the fourth character (music D) is also changed for each “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B). This is the same as the command (variation numbers 46 to 54). However, the singing effect of the fourth character (see FIGS. 103B to 103G) is the singing effect of the second character (see FIGS. 101B to 101G) and the singing effect of the third character. (See FIGS. 102 (B) to 102 (G)).

  Thus, in the “probability variation game effect mode” of the present embodiment, if the probability variation game is effected not only by the character singing effect and the door effect, but also if the character singing effect (that is, the output of the music) continues. Since the sense of expectation for winning improves as the game is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In addition, without performing a reach effect using a plurality of symbol rows as in the conventional case, the character's singing effect and door effect (that is, by the image effect in the effect image display device 115 and the sound output by the speakers 18 and 57), the first Reach production is performed to give the player the expectation of winning the lottery by the special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710. Originally, the image effect in the effect image display device 115 is performed in order to increase the reach aspect by a plurality of symbol sequences, but the image effect is not performed by the plurality of symbol sequences as in the present embodiment. Further, by performing the reach effect only by the sound output from the speakers 18 and 57, the player can listen to the singing by the character without paying attention to the change display of the symbol sequence, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The gaming machine of the present embodiment described above has the following configuration. In addition, the following structures are provided independently or in combination as appropriate.

[Configuration 1]
A game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball is driven toward the game area;
A start opening that is arranged in the game area of the game board and is capable of winning a game ball;
Start detection means for detecting that a game ball has won the start opening;
An opening / closing device that is arranged in the game area, is capable of changing between a closed state and an open state, and that allows a game ball to be won by being changed from the closed state to the open state;
Winning detection means for detecting that a game ball has won the opening and closing device;
A variable display means for displaying at least a variable pattern,
Variation information storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns which are at least variation display patterns;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of game balls by the start detection means;
Fluctuation display control means for performing fluctuation display on the fluctuation display means based on the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation information storage means and performing stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
A game control means having at least a jackpot game execution means for performing a jackpot game capable of opening and closing the opening and closing device and giving a player a game value in response to winning the lottery by the lottery means In gaming machines,
The variation information storage means includes symbol information storage means for storing information related to symbols used for the variation display,
The game control means has a symbol changing means capable of changing a part of a normal symbol to a special symbol that has a different appearance by changing the information stored in the symbol information storage means,
The symbol information storage means stores information on the changed special symbol at least until the next fluctuation display,
The variable display control means is capable of executing variable display of symbols including the special symbols based on information stored in the symbol information storage means,
The game control means can further restore the special symbol to the normal symbol by changing the information stored in the symbol information storage means when the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the variation display means. A gaming machine characterized by having a symbol restoring means.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a game board 5 in which a game area 37 is formed, and a game ball as a game medium is driven toward the game area 37. The game area 37 includes a start port (first start port 390, second start port 392, and third start port 394) through which a game ball driven toward the game region 37 can win, and a closed state and an open state. And an opening / closing device 397 (a jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, a production opening / closing device 398) that allows a game ball to be awarded by being changed from a closed state to an open state, and at least a design (decorative pattern) 1153) and a fluctuation display means (effect display device 115) for performing the fluctuation display. Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes start detection means (a first start port sensor 580, a second start port sensor 582, and a third start port sensor 584) for detecting that a game ball has won the start port, and the opening / closing device. Winning detection means (a jackpot game opening / closing device count sensor 576, effect opening / closing device count sensor 570) and game control means (main control board 510, CPU 611 and display device control board 116) for detecting that a game ball has won 397. ). The game control means includes at least lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700, second special symbol lottery means 710), variable display control means (effect image display control means 616), and jackpot game execution means 515. Yes.

  Here, in particular, the pachinko machine 1 has a symbol changing means capable of changing a part of the normal symbol (decorative symbol 1153) to a special symbol (almighty symbol) that is a different symbol. In the present embodiment, the variation information storage unit (RAM 634 of the display device control board 116) that stores the variation pattern includes the symbol information storage unit (RAM 634) that stores information about the symbol used for variation display. Thereby, the said symbol change means changes a part of decoration symbol 1153 to an almighty symbol (A symbol) by changing the information memorize | stored in RAM634.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95A, the “song” symbol stops in the left symbol column 1153a, the “princess” symbol stops in the right symbol column 1153c, and the “legend” symbol in the middle symbol column 1153b. When is stopped, a short hit, a small hit or a probable length is derived. From this stop mode, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c are replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol).

  Then, based on the information stored in the RAM 634, the effect image display control means 616 executes variable display of symbols including the almighty symbol (A symbol). That is, in a plurality of subsequent variable displays, a variable display using an almighty symbol (A symbol) is executed.

  When the almighty symbol (A symbol) is stopped and displayed by the effect image display control means 616, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is restored to the decorative symbol 1153 by the symbol restoring unit. The symbol restoring means restores the almighty symbol (A symbol) by changing the information stored in the symbol information storage unit (RAM 634).

  Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that changes a symbol when, for example, a reach mode is formed, but it is a symbol change in one change. Therefore, after the end of the change, the symbol returns to the original symbol, making it difficult to have a continuous expectation for the jackpot game.

  In this regard, in Configuration 1, the symbol changing unit changes a part of the normal symbol to a special symbol, and the variable display control unit executes variable display of the symbol including the special symbol. In this way, by using the special symbol for the variable display, the variable display itself can be highly interesting, and the player can start to expect a big hit game.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is restored to the normal symbol by the symbol restoring means. By digesting the special symbol in this way, the player does not have excessive expectations for the jackpot, while the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot game until all the special symbols are digested. Can be sustained.

  From these things, according to the structure 1, the monotonousness of the fluctuation stop mode of the symbol prior to the derivation of the lottery result can be eliminated, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  Conventionally, an effect (referred to as a mission mode or the like) that presents conditions or the like for changing a background image or BGM over a plurality of fluctuations within a certain period and making a big hit is known. However, in such an effect, if the big win lottery is not won within this period, the game will return to the normal game state as it is, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game will be reduced.

  Also in this respect, since the variable display using the special symbol is executed in the configuration 1, for example, if the special symbol is configured to be displayed by stopping the special symbol, the player enjoys the variable display itself. Even if you don't win the jackpot lottery, you can enjoy the games during that time. As a result, it is possible to reliably suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Configuration 2]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the symbol changing means can change a specific normal symbol into the special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the specific symbols in the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are changed to an almighty symbol (A symbol). That is, a new symbol is not added to the decorative symbol 1153, but a specific symbol of the original decorative symbol 1153 is changed to an almighty symbol (A symbol). Specifically, the specific decorative symbol 1153 includes a “song” symbol, a “princess” symbol, and a “legend” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a, and a “song” symbol, a “princess” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c, And it is a “legend” symbol.

  According to the configuration 2, since a specific normal symbol is changed to a special symbol, the special symbol is added and the total number of symbols is increased. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the derivation probability of the special performance has increased.

[Configuration 3]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 2,
The symbol change means includes a change number determination means for determining the number of changes to the special symbol, and a change means for changing the specific normal symbol to the special symbol by the number determined by the change number determination means. A gaming machine characterized by having the following.

  In the present embodiment, by executing the A symbol usage number setting process (see FIGS. 78 to 80), the setting number (change number) of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is set. Here, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is determined with reference to the tables (FIGS. 83 and 84) based on the gaming state. Then, the specific decorative design 1153 is changed to the almighty design (A design) by the determined number. The peripheral control board 610 that executes the A symbol usage number setting process constitutes the “change number determination means”, the effect image display control means 616 of the display device control board 116 constitutes the “change means”, and the peripheral control board. 610 and effect image display control means 616 constitute “symbol changing means”.

  According to the configuration 3, the number of changes to the special symbol is determined by the change number determining unit, and the specific normal symbol is changed to the special symbol by the changing unit by the determined number. In other words, since the normal symbol to be changed is specified in advance, the change is made by determining the number of changes to the special symbol. Thereby, the control configuration of the symbol changing means becomes relatively simple. Moreover, since the number of changes to the special symbol is not uniform, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Configuration 4]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1 to 3,
The symbol restoration means has restoration number determination means for determining the number of restorations of the special symbol, and restoration means for restoring the special symbols to the normal symbol by the number determined by the restoration number determination means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the A symbol consumption process of FIG. 81, the A symbol consumption number (restoration number) is drawn based on the variation pattern (step S344791). Here, the consumption number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined with reference to the table (see FIG. 85) based on the gaming state. Then, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is restored to the decorative symbol 1153 by the determined number.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 95A, when the “song” symbol stops in the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol stops in the right symbol row 1153c, and the “legend” symbol stops in the middle symbol row 1153b. It has already been mentioned that short hits, small hits or probable lengths are derived. At this time, as shown in the chance A symbol consumption process of FIG. 82, the “song” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a is changed to the almighty symbol (A symbol), or the “song” in the left symbol column 1153a. When the “princess” symbol in the right symbol row 1153c is changed to the almighty symbol (A symbol) together with the symbol, the symbol “1” is restored to the decorative symbol 1153 when the almighty symbol (A symbol) is stopped.

  Note that the peripheral control board 610 that executes the A symbol consumption process and the chance A symbol consumption process constitutes the “restoration number determining means”, and the effect image display control means 616 of the display device control board 116 constitutes the “restoration means”. To do.

  According to Configuration 4, the number of special symbols to be restored is determined by the restoration number determining means, and the restoration means restores the normal symbols by the determined number. In other words, since the special symbol to be restored is specified in advance, the restoration is performed by determining the number of restorations of the special symbol. As a result, the control configuration of the symbol restoration means becomes relatively simple. In addition, since the number of special symbols to be restored is not uniform, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Configuration 5]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1 to 4,
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the variable display control means, a special effect is executed,
The gaming machine characterized in that the symbol restoring means can change the stopped special symbol to a normal symbol for the special effect, and then restore the normal symbol before the change.

  In this embodiment, in the change after the specific decorative design 1153 changes to the almighty design (A design), either the stop design of the left design sequence 1153a or the stop design of the right design sequence 1153c is the almighty design (A design). ), It is controlled so that reach always occurs. In this case, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is changed in accordance with the other stop symbol (decorative symbol 1153). Further, when both the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are almighty symbols (A symbol), control is performed so that long hits are always generated. After that, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is restored to the decorative symbol 1153 before the change.

  According to the configuration 5, since the special effect is executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display using the special symbol is highly interesting. In addition, the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is changed to a normal symbol for a special effect, and then restored to the normal symbol before the change. By digesting the special symbols that are stopped and displayed in this way, the player will not be overly expected, while maintaining the player's expectation until all of the special symbols are digested. be able to.

[Configuration 6]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1 to 5,
The jackpot executing means includes at least a long hit game executing means for executing a long hit game for performing an opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device in a mode in which the game balls can be sufficiently won, and a mode in which the game balls are not easily won. Short hit game execution means for executing a short hit game for performing an opening and closing operation of the opening and closing device,
The game control means, in response to winning the lottery by the lottery means, small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game for performing an opening and closing operation of the opening and closing device in the same manner as the short hit game, and the jackpot As a gaming state related to the lottery for determining execution of the jackpot game by the game execution means, a high probability lottery gaming state in which a lottery is performed with a relatively high winning probability, or a low lottery in which a lottery is performed with a relatively low winning probability Gaming state control means that can be controlled to the probability lottery gaming state,
The gaming state control means controls the high probability lottery gaming state after the short winning game is executed by the short winning game execution means regardless of the gaming state before winning the short winning game, and the small winning game After completion of the small hit game by the execution means, the game state before the winning of the small hit game is controlled,
The symbol change means changes the normal symbol to the special symbol when the short hit game execution means confirms execution of the short hit game or the small hit game execution means determines execution of the small hit game. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the “song” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row 1153c, and only the middle symbol row 1153b is scrolled in the vertical direction. Is a reach variation that may be won per short hit, small hit or probable length (see FIG. 67 (G)). Then, when the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, occurrence of a short hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, or a long hit gaming state is determined (see FIG. 67 (H)). Then, after the “Legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and a part of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol). Is done. Then, after the end of the short win game state, the winning probability of the big win game is controlled to a high probability state (so-called probability change state) with a relatively high win probability regardless of the game state before winning the short win game.

  According to the configuration 6, the normal symbol is changed to a special symbol when the short hit game execution means is confirmed by the short hit game execution means or the small hit game execution means is confirmed by the small hit game execution means. Here, when the short win game is executed, the winning probability of the big hit game is controlled to a high probability lottery game state with a relatively high probability. Therefore, for the player, the change to the special symbol itself is an effect that can be expected to shift to the high-probability lottery game state, which contributes to an improvement in the fun of the game.

  Normally, in a long hit game, the opening / closing device 397 is opened for a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) so that a certain number of game balls (for example, 9) can be won in one round. The opening / closing device 397 is closed when a certain number of game balls are won or a certain time elapses. In this way, when the goal is to win a certain number of game balls, a mode in which a number of game balls close to the certain number (for example, 7 to 9) can be won is “a game ball is won enough. A possible embodiment. " On the other hand, a mode in which only a number (for example, 1 to 3) of gaming balls far from the certain number wins is a “mode in which gaming balls are not likely to win sufficiently”. In this sense, “a long-permission game execution means for performing a per-long game that opens and closes the opening / closing device in a manner in which a number of game balls close to a predetermined number can be won”, “a number of game balls far from the predetermined number” Alternatively, a short hit game executing means for executing a short hit game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device is performed in such a manner that only a prize is awarded.

[Configuration 7]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 6,
When the symbol change means wins the short win game or the small hit game by lottery by the lottery means, the normal symbol is changed to the special symbol prior to the next change executed after the change indicating the win. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In this embodiment, the “song” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row 1153c, and the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b. The symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and a part of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol).

  According to Configuration 7, since the normal symbol is changed to the special symbol prior to the next variation executed after the variation indicating the winning of the short win game or the small hit game, the variation display using the special symbol is performed from the next variation. As a result, the winning of the short win game or the small hit game can be surely suggested by a variable display using a special symbol.

[Configuration 8]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 7,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the symbol changing means changes the normal symbol to the special symbol at a timing in accordance with a variation indicating winning of the short hit game or the small hit game.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, after the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and the left symbol row 1153a and a part of the right symbol row 1153c are partly displayed. Replaced by almighty symbol (A symbol).

  According to Configuration 8, since the normal symbol is changed to a special symbol at a timing in accordance with the variation indicating the winning of the short hit game or the small hit game, the change to the special symbol is changed to the short hit game or the small hit game. Can be won.

[Configuration 9]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 8,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the symbol changing means changes the normal symbol to the special symbol when a variation display by a variation pattern indicating the winning of the short hit game or the small hit game is executed.

  Even in the configuration 9, since the normal symbol is changed to a special symbol when the variation display by the variation pattern indicating the winning of the short hit game or the small hit game is executed, as in the configuration 10, by the change effect to the special symbol, Winning a short win game or a small win game can be suggested.

[Configuration 10]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 8 or 9,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the symbol changing means changes the normal symbol to the special symbol when displaying a variation in a variation indicating winning of the short win game or the small hit game.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, after the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and the left symbol row 1153a and a part of the right symbol row 1153c are partly displayed. Replaced by almighty symbol (A symbol). That is, the change to the almighty symbol (A symbol) is performed during the variable display indicating the winning per short or small win.

  According to the structure 10, since the normal symbol is changed to the special symbol when the variation in the variation indicating the winning of the short hit game or the small hit game is changed, the change effect to the special symbol is conspicuous, and the short win game or It is possible to reliably suggest winning of a small hit game.

[Configuration 11]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 8 or 9,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the symbol changing means changes the normal symbol to the special symbol when displaying a stop in a variation indicating winning of the short hit game or the small hit game.

  According to the structure 11, since the normal symbol is changed to the special symbol at the time of the stop display in the variation indicating the winning of the short hit game or the small hit game, there is a possibility that the subsequent variation display using the special symbol becomes fresh. And can give the player a surprise like "Oh?" As a result, winning for a short win game or a small hit game can be suggested.

[Configuration 12]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 6 to 11,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the symbol changing means determines the number of changes to the special symbol depending on which of the short winning game and the small winning game is determined to be executed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, when the execution of the small hit game is confirmed, that is, when the variation pattern is the small hit chance (YES in step S34472), the number of symbols used in the small hit A symbol is used. Setting processing is executed (step S34473). On the other hand, when the execution of the short hit game is confirmed, that is, when the variation pattern is the second chance per 2R (YES in step S34474), the A symbol usage number setting process per 2R is executed (step S34475).

  According to the configuration 12, the number of changes to the special symbol is determined according to which of the short hit game and the small hit game is determined to be executed. Therefore, for example, if the selection probability of the number of changes is made different between short wins and small hits, it is possible to infer whether or not it is an advantageous state (high probability lottery state by execution of short hit games). Thus, the player can feel “hot” even when the special symbol is changed. As a result, it contributes to improving the interests of the game.

[Configuration 13]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 6 to 12,
The gaming machine characterized in that the symbol changing means determines the number of changes to the special symbol in accordance with the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the A symbol usage number setting process includes the small hitting A symbol usage number setting process in FIG. 78, the 2R per hour 2 A symbol usage number setting process, and FIG. A process of setting the number of A symbols used per 15R is included. Then, in each process, it is determined whether or not the state is a low probability state, and a table is selected. Specifically, in the small hitting time A symbol usage number setting process, if it is determined that the state is a low probability state (YES in step S344732), a lottery is selected from the low probability → small hitting time table (see FIG. 83 (a)). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the low probability state (NO in step S344732), a lottery is performed from the high probability → small hitting time table (see FIG. 83 (b)) (step S344734). In addition, in the 2R per hour A symbol usage number setting process, if it is determined that the state is low probability (YES in step S344475), a lottery is performed from the low probability → 2R per hour table (see FIG. 83 (c)). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the low probability state (NO in step S344475), the lottery is performed from the high probability → 2R per hour table (see FIG. 83 (d)) (step S344754). Furthermore, in the per-R 15R hour A symbol usage count setting process, if it is determined that the state is in a low probability state (YES in step S344472), a lottery is performed from the low probability → 15R per hour table (see FIG. 84A). On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is not the low probability state (NO in Step S344472), the lottery is performed from the high probability → 15R per hour table (see FIG. 84B).

  According to the configuration 13, since the number of changes to the special symbol is determined according to the gaming state by the gaming state control means, the gaming state can be estimated to some extent from the number of changes of the special symbol. Thereby, the change to the special symbol itself is highly interesting.

[Configuration 14]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 6 to 13,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the symbol restoring means determines the number of restorations of the special symbol based on the gaming state by the gaming state control means.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the A symbol consumption process of FIG. 81, it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (steps S344784 and S344788), and the consumption number (restoration number) of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined. Has been decided. Specifically, when it is in a high probability state (YES in step S344784, YES in step S344788), reference is made to the A symbol use number distribution tables C and D, whereas when it is not in a high probability state (NO in step S344784). In step S344788, NO), reference is made to the A symbol used number distribution tables B and E.

  According to the configuration 14, since the number of restorations of the special symbol is determined based on the gaming state by the gaming state control means, it becomes possible to estimate the gaming state to some extent from the number of restorations, and the variation using the special symbol The display itself is highly interesting. As a result, it contributes to improving the fun of games.

[Configuration 15]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 14,
The gaming machine characterized in that the symbol restoration means determines the number of restorations of the special symbol so that at least one of the special symbols is not restored in the high probability lottery gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “1” and in a high probability state (YES in step S34483, step S344784). In step S344785, the A symbol used number distribution table C is selected. In the A symbol use number allocation table C, as shown in FIG. 85, the consumption number (restoration number) of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is always allocated to “0” with respect to the deviation variation. Thereby, in the case of a high probability state, the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbols) does not become “0”. Therefore, while the almighty symbol (A symbol) remains, there is a possibility of a high probability state, and the player's sense of expectation can be reliably maintained.

  According to Configuration 15, since the number of special symbols to be restored is determined so that at least one of the special symbols is not restored in the high probability lottery game state, the high probability lottery game remains while the special symbols remain. There is a possibility that the player is in a state, and the player's expectation can be reliably maintained.

[Configuration 16]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1 to 15,
The gaming machine characterized in that the symbol changing means determines the number of changes to the special symbol based on the number of remaining special symbols.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83 and FIG. 84, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) based on the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) (A number at the time of temporary stop) A number) is determined.

  According to the configuration 16, since the number of changes to the special symbol is determined based on the remaining number of special symbols, it is possible to set an appropriate number of special symbols.

[Configuration 17]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1 to 16,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the symbol restoring means determines the number of restorations of the special symbol based on a fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation information storage means.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85, the number of A symbols consumed (the number of restorations) is drawn based on the variation pattern (step S344791). Specifically, the consumption number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined corresponding to the variation pattern commands of the variation numbers 8 to 15, 27, 28, 34, 35, 41, and 42.

  According to the configuration 17, since the number of special symbols to be restored is determined based on the variation pattern stored in the variation information storage means, the special symbol is digested according to the game, and the variation display using the special symbol is interesting. It will be expensive.

[Configuration 18]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1 to 17,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the symbol restoring means determines the number of restored special symbols based on the number of remaining special symbols.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “0” (step S344781), “1” (step S344783), and “2” or more ( In step S344787), the number of consumption (restoration number) of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined. Specifically, the A symbol used number allocation tables A to E to be referred to are determined by this case classification (step S344478, step S344785, step S344786, step S344789, step S344790).

  According to the configuration 18, since the number of special symbols to be restored is determined based on the remaining number of special symbols, the special symbols are appropriately digested in the variable display using the special symbols, and the special symbols are used. The interest of variable display is not reduced.

  Moreover, although this invention is described in said preferable embodiment, this invention is not restrict | limited only to it. Various embodiments are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.

  For example, the effect image display device in the above-described embodiment is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, etc. The invention can be applied. In consideration of the application of the present invention to a pachislot machine, the “game ball” in each of the above configurations may be used as a “game medium”.

  In other words, a pachinko machine is a game in which an input medium such as a game ball that is a medium that a player inserts into the game machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  There are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state) Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entrance state detection means, and special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. Or “additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence composed of a plurality of decorative symbols and causing characters or the like to appear at a predetermined timing” , Which is generally represented by what is referred to as a “multi-function machine”, comprising a lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in an accessory and lottery means for performing lottery by winning at the start opening. ”, Represented by what is generally called“ Alepatchi ”“ For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 games, and the game balls are placed in a plurality of entrances in one game. In accordance with this, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls” can be exemplified.

  On the other hand, with a pachislot machine, a medal that is a game medium is inserted, and after inserting the medal, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the operation of the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). It is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the variation of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In addition, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined is a plurality of (for example, five) game balls that are used as one unit of input medium. ) Is variably displayed in accordance with the operation of), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, it seems that there is no gaming medium at first glance in a gaming machine that does not play a substantial game depending on the medium to be inserted, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even in such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the game content played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

  In addition, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT. That is, as long as the first display mode, the third display mode, and the second display mode can be displayed, and any of these modes can be hidden, the mode is not limited.

It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the main body frame was opened by the one side of the outer frame of a pachinko machine, and the front frame was opened by the one side of the main body frame. It is a front view which shows the whole front side of a pachinko machine. It is an enlarged front view which shows the structure of a game area | region. It is a rear view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine from upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the back cover body, various control boards, etc. from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which various members were assembled | attached to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows a main-body frame simple substance from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the game board with which various control board boxes were mounted | worn from lower right back. It is an enlarged front view which shows the structure of the game board which has a game area | region. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally forward, Comprising: It is a perspective view which enabled visual recognition of the 1st warp and the 2nd warp by removing a decoration cover. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the periphery of a 1st warp and a 2nd warp. It is the figure which showed the positional relationship of a light transmissive member, a 1st warp, and a 2nd warp. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board containing the effect for an effect. It is a perspective view which shows the game board base which supports a game board from the front upper front. (A) It is an enlarged front view of a game board. (B) It is the sectional view on the AA line shown by (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the opening / closing apparatus for production | presentation, the accessory guidance path, the distribution mechanism, and the production | presentation accessory from the upper left. It is a top view of an accessory guide path, a distribution mechanism, and a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the aspect by which a game ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism. It is a top view of an accessory guide path, a distribution mechanism, and a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the aspect by which a game ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism. It is a top view of an accessory guide path, a distribution mechanism, and a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the aspect by which a game ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the accessory container of a production | presentation accessory. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of the peripheral control board in a main board | substrate and a peripheral board | substrate. (A) It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the accessory container of a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows that the 1st production eaves inclines downward toward the 1st performance exit. (B) It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the accessory container of a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows that the 1st production | presentation heel inclines below toward the 2nd production | presentation 樋 induction port. It is the figure which looked at the production image display device from the front. It is the figure which looked at the production image display device from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the periphery control board in a periphery board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory | storage area | region concerned with a reservation order. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd starting opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time variation pattern table setting process per 1st special symbol length. It is a list figure which shows the variation pattern selected in the pattern table setting process at the time of the 1st special symbol length. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time variation pattern table setting process per 2nd special symbol length. It is a list figure which shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the 2nd special symbol length per hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a short hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the short hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process and the small hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table setting process at the time of the 1st special symbol removal. FIG. 52 is a flowchart continued from A of FIG. 51. FIG. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern selected when it is judged as reach in the 1st special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd special symbol change time fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart continuing from C of FIG. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern selected when it is judged that it is reach in the 2nd special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selected when it is not judged as reach in the 1st special symbol deviation time fluctuation pattern table setting process and the 2nd special symbol loss time fluctuation pattern table setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory small hit control process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the change time concerning the change pattern of the detachment without the reach production at the time short-time function non-operation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the fluctuation time concerning the deviation fluctuation pattern which does not accompany the reach production at the time short-time function operation. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration symbol in the case of deriving | leading out the lottery result by a 1st special symbol lottery means to an effect image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration symbol in the case of deriving | leading out the lottery result by a 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration symbol in the case of deriving the said lottery result to an effect image display apparatus, when the lottery result by a special symbol lottery means is a short hit or a small hit. It is a functional block diagram which shows mainly the function which concerns on display mode determination among the functional structures of a main control board. It is a time chart which expressed the display mode of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol in time series. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd start opening effective winning memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd and 3rd start opening effective winning effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern determination in the decoration design variation start process, and A mode setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small symbol time A symbol usage number setting process in a fluctuation pattern determination and A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time A symbol usage number setting process per 2R in a fluctuation pattern determination and A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hour A symbol use number setting process per 15R in a fluctuation pattern determination and A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of A symbol consumption processing in change pattern determination and A mode setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance A symbol consumption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the setting number of A symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the setting number of A symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the use number (restoration number) of A symbol in A symbol consumption processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the use number (restoration number) of A symbol in A symbol consumption process at the time of a chance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special effect lottery process in a decoration design change start process. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining whether an effect point storage process is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the storage display mode of the production | presentation point P performed according to the 2nd and 3rd starting opening valid winning flag being ON. It is a figure which shows an example of the storage display mode of the production | presentation point P performed according to having won the production | presentation point P storage lottery. It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed with an effect image display apparatus at the time of execution of a "normal special aspect". It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed with an effect image display apparatus at the time of execution of the "intro special aspect" of the 2nd character (music B). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed with an effect image display apparatus at the time of execution of the "intro special aspect" of the 3rd character (musical piece C). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect image display apparatus at the time of execution of the "intro special aspect" of the 4th character (musical piece D). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed with an effect image display apparatus at the time of execution of a "chance eyes special aspect." It is a front view of the effect image display device and the effect item before winning the effect opening / closing device. It is a front view of the effect image display device and the effect item after winning the effect opening / closing device. It is a front view of the effect image display apparatus at the time of mode lottery effect and the effect for effects. It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed with an effect image display apparatus at the time of execution of a "long hit effect aspect." It is a front view of the effect image display apparatus at the time of lottery after lottery effect (actor lottery effect) and the effect for the effect. It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect image display apparatus at the time of execution of the "probability change game effect aspect" of the 2nd character (music B). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect image display apparatus at the time of execution of the "probability change game effect aspect" of the 3rd character (music C). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed with an effect image display apparatus at the time of execution of the "probability change game effect aspect" of the 4th character (music D).

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Front frame 5 Game board 6 Bottom receiving plate 7 Hinge mechanism 11 Front frame body 12 Game board installation frame 13 Mechanism installation body 14 Outer frame side hinge tool 15 Main body frame side hinge tool 16 Speaker box Part 17 Speaker mounting version 18 Speaker 19 Launch rail 30 Lower front plate 31 Lower tray 32 Operation handle 33 Ashtray 34 Ball discharge lever 36 Hinge mechanism 37 Game region 37a Game region 38 Open window 39 Window frame 50 Transparent plate 51 Upper plate 52 Side decoration Device 53 Acoustic decoration device 54 Side decoration body 55 Lens 56 Transparent cover body 57 Speaker 58 Speaker cover 60 Production selection switch 70 Locking device 71 Closing tool 72 Body frame locking hook 73 Closing tool 74 Door locking hook 75 Cylinder lock 76 Outer rail 77 Inner rail 78 Guide rail 79 Front component member 80 Game area forming wall 82 Normal view Indicator 84 First special symbol indicator 86 Second special symbol indicator 88 First special symbol hold indicator 90 Second special symbol hold indicator 92 Normal symbol hold indicator 115 Production image display device 115a First determination result display Area 115b Second determination result display area 115c Common symbol display area 116 Display device control board 117 Display device control board box 118 Box mounting base 130 Peripheral control board box 132 Main control board box 133 Tank mounting section 134 Rail mounting section 135 Dispensing device Mounting part 136 Ball tank 137 Bottom plate part 138 Discharge port 139 Rail component 150 Tank rail 151 Front wall part 152 Rear wall part 155 Rail shelf 156 Rectifier 157 Shaft 158 Rail receiving part 170 Ball delivery device 172 Delivery motor 173 Opening part 192 Launch motor 193 Mounting board 194 Projector unit 195 Power supply board 196 Power supply board box 197 Delivery control board 198 Delivery control board box 199 Power supply relay terminal board 210 Rear cover body 211 Cover hinge mechanism 212 Rear wall part 213 Peripheral wall part 213a Wall part 213b Wall part 213c Upper side wall part 214 Hinge body 215 Hinge pin 216 Hinge body 217 Elastic closing body 218 Inspection connector 230 Heat radiation hole 231 Heat radiation hole 232 Heat radiation hole 233 Sealing portion 237 Code holder 238 Power distribution board 239 Board connector 252 Interface board 253 Lower plate ball derivative 254 Substrate box 300 Center accessory 301 Opening 302 Center illumination unit 304 Center decoration lamp 306 First warp inlet 308 Second warp inlet 310 Second warp guide piece 312 First warp outlet 314 Second warp Exit 316 First warp 318 Second warp 330 First stage 332 Peak 334 Valley 336 First warp outlet side end 338 First warp counter-exit side end 340 Second start port guide groove 342 Second stage guide groove 350 Second stage 352 High platform part 354 Curved part 356 Second warp outlet side end part 358 Second warp counter-exit side end part 360 Front inclined groove 362 First start port guide port guide groove 364 Stage partition wall 366 Communication part 368 First start Mouth guide port 370 Frame-shaped decorative body 370a Lower frame 370c Right frame 370b Left frame 372 Opening 374 First start port guide path 376 Third stage 378 Front guide groove 379 Electric decoration member 380 Light source 382 Base 386 Decoration cover 388 Light transmission member 390 First start port 392 Second start port 394 Third start port 396 Pair of movable pieces 397 Opening / closing device 39 Opening / closing device for production 400 Opening / closing device for jackpot game 402 Passage gate 404 General prize opening 420 Production role 422 Performance object housing 424 Figure 426 Production 樋 428 First production 樋 430 Support shaft 432 First performance outlet 434 Second production Samurai guide port 436 Second outlet 440 Accessory guide path 450 Sorting mechanism 452 Solenoid 454 Game ball holding member 456 Connecting member 458 Pin 480 Game board base 500 Main board 502 First special symbol display control means 504 Second special symbol Display control means 508 Merge hold order display control means 510 Main control board 511 CPU
512 ROM
513 RAM
513 Special symbol random number storage area 513a First storage area 5131b Second storage area 5131c Third storage area 5131d Fourth storage area 5131e Fifth storage area 5131f Sixth storage area 5131g Seventh storage area 5131h Eightth storage area 5132 Processing area 514 Small hit game execution means 515 Large hit game execution means 515a Long hit game execution means 515b Short hit game execution means 516 Normal symbol display control means 518 Normal symbol hold display control means 520 Dispensing control board 522 CPU
524 ROM
526 RAM
530 Lower plate full switch 532 Firing control board 534 External terminal board 536 Inner frame opening switch 538 Door opening switch 550 Panel relay terminal board 552 Production switchgear relay terminal board 554 Big hit game switchgear relay terminal board 560 Gate sensor 562 General Winning mouth sensor 568 Normal symbol / special symbol display board 570 Effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 Bonus game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 574 Normal electric accessory solenoid 576 Jackpot game opening / closing device count sensor 578 Effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 580 First Start port sensor 582 Second start port sensor 584 Third start port sensor 586 All winning ports winning number detection sensor 600 Peripheral board 610 Peripheral control board 611 CPU
612 ROM
613 RAM
614 First special symbol image display control means 615 Second special symbol image display control means 616 Production image display control means 618 Sound source IC
619 ROM
620 Merge hold display control means 626 Merge hold order storage means 628 First special symbol hold number storage means 630 Second special symbol hold number storage means 631 Effect hold count means 632 CPU
634 RAM
636 ROM
638 VDP
639 Image ROM
640 Frame decoration relay terminal plate 642 Frame decoration lamp 650 Lamp drive board 652 Panel decoration lamp 654 Discharge port sensor 658 Rotation part motor 660 Rotation part motor sensor 662 Center decoration drive part relay terminal board 664 Rotation part lower LED board 666 Sphere distribution part motor Sensor 668 Ball distributing unit motor 670 Rotating unit LED board 700 First special symbol lottery means 702 First special symbol per-determination random number extracting unit 703 First special symbol holding counter 704 First special symbol success / failure determining unit 706 Special symbol normal time Hit determination table 708 Special symbol probability change time determination table 710 Second special symbol lottery means 712 Second special symbol hit determination random number extraction means 713 Second special symbol hold counter 714 Second special symbol success / failure determination means 720 Normal symbol lottery Means 722 Normal symbol per judgment Random number extraction means 723 Normal symbol hold counter 724 Normal symbol success / failure determination means 726 Normal symbol normal time hit determination table 727 Normal symbol short time hit determination table 728 Second start opening / closing control means 730 Second special symbol hold display control means 732 Small hit game execution means 734 Probability game execution means 736 Time-short game execution means 738 Opening / closing operation control means 740 Reservation order storage means 746 Command transmission means 750 Command reception means 760 Effect lottery means 762 Effect accessory action execution means 770 Display mode storage means 772 First display mode determination means 773 First display mode determination selection means 774 Reach out display mode selection determination means 775 Winning display mode selection determination means 776 Outgoing display mode determination means 777 Advantageous gaming state out-of-display display determination means 778 Second display mode Determination means 779 Second display mode determination / selection means 780 Reach out special display mode selection / determination means 781 Special display mode selection / determination means 782 Outgoing special display mode determination means 783 Advantageous gaming state shortening / exclusion display mode determination means 1150 Holding display area 1151 First holding Display area 1151a First hold storage display section 1151b Second hold storage display section 1151c Third hold storage display section 1151d Fourth hold storage display section 1152 Second hold display area 1152a Fifth hold storage display section 1152b 6th hold memory display part 1152c 7th hold memory display part 1152d 8th hold memory display part 1153 decoration symbol 1154 effect point display area 1154a effect point 1 display part 1154b effect point 2 display part 1154c effect point 3 display part 1154d Production point 4 display 11 54e Effect point 5 display portion 1154f Effect point 6 display portion 1154g Effect point 7 display portion 1154h Effect point 8 display portion 1154i Effect point 9 display portion 1154j Effect point 10 display portion 3861 Warp view hole 3862 Warp view hole 3881 Plane portion 3882 End 3981 Production winning prize opening 3982 Opening / closing door 4001 Big hit game winning prize opening 4002 Opening / closing door 4221 Drop opening 4241 One hand 4261 Right end 4262 Left end 4281 Right end 4282 Left end 4521 Plunger 6201 Holdable information image display control means 6202 First hold information image display Control means 6203 Second hold information image display control means 6204 Identification code image display control means 6205 Merge hold order image display control means

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball is driven toward the game area;
A start opening that is arranged in the game area of the game board and is capable of winning a game ball;
Start detection means for detecting that a game ball has won the start opening;
An opening / closing device that is arranged in the game area, is capable of changing between a closed state and an open state, and that allows a game ball to be won by being changed from the closed state to the open state;
Winning detection means for detecting that a game ball has won the opening and closing device;
A variable display means for displaying at least a variable pattern,
Variation information storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns which are at least variation display patterns;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of game balls by the start detection means;
Fluctuation display control means for performing fluctuation display on the fluctuation display means based on the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation information storage means and performing stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
A game control means having at least a jackpot game execution means for performing a jackpot game capable of opening and closing the opening and closing device and giving a player a game value in response to winning the lottery by the lottery means In gaming machines,
The variation information storage means includes symbol information storage means for storing information related to symbols used for the variation display,
The game control means has a symbol changing means capable of changing a part of a normal symbol to a special symbol that has a different appearance by changing the information stored in the symbol information storage means,
The symbol information storage means stores information on the changed special symbol at least until the next fluctuation display,
The variable display control means is capable of executing variable display of symbols including the special symbols based on information stored in the symbol information storage means,
The game control means can further restore the special symbol to the normal symbol by changing the information stored in the symbol information storage means when the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the variation display means. A gaming machine characterized by having a symbol restoring means.